JP7413051B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines are known that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display becoming a specific display result. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game to be executable based on seven symbols being stopped and displayed on a decorative symbol display device.

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2014-147575

According to the gaming machine described above, during execution of the jackpot start performance, a right-hitting instruction is given to prompt the player to fire the game ball to the right by operating the ball firing handle. There is still room for improvement regarding instructions that prompt the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention was devised in view of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably execute an instruction urging a player to shoot a game ball in a predetermined direction. be.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display of performance identification information becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
Display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
a guide light emitting means that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
a state control means capable of controlling to a specific state;
an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display;
a state control means capable of controlling a special state more advantageous than the normal state after the control of the advantageous state is completed ;
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to the specific state when a specific condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating device becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times;
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The display means is
Displaying the second guide display in a first period of a predetermined period in which a start effect regarding the start of control of the advantageous state is executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state. and performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period that is during the predetermined period and subsequent to the first period, and in a subsequent period, terminating the first guidance display. The second guidance display is performed at
Displaying the second guidance in the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
When the specific condition is met, it is possible to execute a specific notification effect that notifies that the specific condition has been met,
not performing the first guide display when the start effect is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the special state;
The guide light emitting means is configured to perform, when the start effect is executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state,
In the first period, the light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the guide light emission,
extinguishing the light emitting means before the second period starts;
emitting the guide light together with the first guide display when the second period starts;
The specific notification performance is a performance that reduces the visibility of the performance identification information,
It is characterized by
Furthermore, (1) variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are executed, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) is executed. ) is a gaming machine that can be controlled to
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
moreover,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update the numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 12-13, the state control means includes a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the state control means makes the numerical information updated by the updating means a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. By this, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, As shown, the updating means (the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) is used when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed. It is characterized in that the numerical information is updated depending on the case (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be relieved and increasing his motivation to play.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the following means A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that can be controlled to a special state in which a variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-95449. For example, Patent Document 1 states that even if the number of times the special figure game is executed in the normal gaming state (the number of times the variable display is executed) reaches 1000 times (special number of times), when a jackpot (advantageous state) does not occur, Conditions are met), the gaming state is controlled to be variable, the probability that a jackpot will be determined as a result of the special pattern game is increased to about 1/100, and jackpots are more likely to occur in subsequent special pattern games. It is stated that. Furthermore, in Patent Document 1, when a jackpot does not occur even when the number of special figure games (the number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 in a normal gaming state, a time saving state is generated instead of a variable probability state. It is stated that it can be used as a product.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there has been insufficient consideration of interest when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a special number, and during the period before and after that.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is rich in interest.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and provides an advantageous advantageous state when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. (for example, a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, in FIG. 12-17 As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display are executed. The state control means includes an update means (for example, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can update the numerical information based on the When the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, the special condition can be controlled to be in a special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is , the numerical information is updated depending on whether the first identification information is displayed variably or the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in FIG. 12-52 (C1), ( C2), the background image changes, as shown in Figure 12-53 (B), there is a blackout at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in Figure 12-54 (C), there is a blackout at the end of the fluctuation, etc.) The system further includes an executable special notification performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638), and the predetermined suggestion performance execution means is configured to satisfy the special conditions. In the previous period, the rate at which the predetermined suggestion performance is executed is the same (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-44, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 12-50).
According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

Note that this invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention, or it may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention. It may be something.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a feature of the present embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing a frame lamp. It is an explanatory view showing a special figure LED board and a 4th pattern unit. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. It is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release post-processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of production processing during jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuation. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. It is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It is an explanatory view showing a lighting mode of a lamp. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a child table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a grandchild table in a lighting data table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is an explanatory view showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during a fanfare performance due to one winning special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during one round of jackpot at the time of winning one special figure. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the first round of jackpot when the player wins the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. It is an explanatory view showing the presentation mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine recovers from a power outage during the fourth round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. It is an explanatory view showing the performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the fourth round of jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory view showing the production mode of the pachinko game machine when the game machine returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. It is an explanatory diagram showing a performance mode of the pachinko game machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special figure 1. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each set value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each setting value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining time saving type. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 108IW. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the feature section 108IW. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. FIG. 7 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 108IW. It is a flowchart showing a specific example of production control main processing in the feature section 108IW. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows customer waiting demonstration performance control processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of a telop display while waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows advance notice setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a pre-read preview performance execution determination table, a pre-read preview performance type determination table, and a pre-read preview performance mode determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each performance type of a look-ahead preview performance. It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via relief. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a notice production execution decision table and a notice production mode decision table. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a performance mode of a time-saving rush performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a false countdown production and an effect production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol stop processing in modification 1. 7 is a flowchart illustrating next change postponement processing in Modification 1. FIG. 7 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of effects when executing a variable display that shortens rescue time in modification example 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process in Example 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a preview performance execution determination table and a preview performance mode determination table in Example 2; 12 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Embodiment 2;

<Basic explanation>
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

[Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.]
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol” or “first special symbol,” and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “first special symbol.” It is also called ``2nd special pattern'' or ``2nd special pattern.'' Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electro luminescence), and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special patterns are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole which is always kept in a constant open state into which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hitting ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's actions (operations, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, such as at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17, for example.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is arranged at the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) to the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

[Outline of game progress]
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In a special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which hardly any prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-saving number-cutting, variable number-cutting probability, etc.).

A normal state is a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, control may be performed to change the probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of performance)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern game. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. For example, reach effects include normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative patterns (for example, "7", etc.) will be stopped and displayed, and the state will be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5, etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). Further, as other performances, for example, a preview performance that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed while the decorative symbols are being displayed variably. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (the jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

[Substrate configuration]
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V DC, 5 V DC, etc.), and the like. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The output circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), the game status (for example, the start and end of variable display, the opening status of the big prize opening, the occurrence of a prize, the number of pending memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has the function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions on At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishment (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. For example, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, a clear signal in an on state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; N), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as the game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, and if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 and The setting change process in step S7 is executed and control becomes possible in the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed along with the recovery process in step S4 and control becomes possible in the setting confirmation state. . When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process in step S6 is executed. Although it is executed, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing the execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing for when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying judgment results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (whether or not there is reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and decreasing the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the lower the probability of winning the jackpot. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small win" and controlled to a small win game state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to the small win gaming state is determined by the first special figure display result, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (for executing a predetermined production each time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It can also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the on-board CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register settings of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; N), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Y), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the control contents of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative symbols should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

[Variation of basic explanation]
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by downloading programs and data via a communication line and storing them in internal memory. Alternatively, the process may be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%."

<Explanation regarding characteristic part 075F>
Next, a gaming machine according to the feature section 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-60.

[Configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to characteristic part 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1 according to the characteristic part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in place of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 10-4), and the big winning hole door changes between an open state and a closed state (hereinafter referred to as (Usually called the big winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is installed in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1. It is equipped with a grand prize opening door, and by sliding the grand prize opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open and close it, the path to the regular big prize opening for game balls is opened. be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, thereby closing the regular winning opening, and the game ball enters the regular winning opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the big prize opening door slides toward the back of the pachinko game machine 1, thereby opening the regular winning opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the regular winning opening. .

The game ball that has entered the normal big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through an area provided inside the normal big winning opening. When the game balls are detected by the count switch 23, game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the normal big prize opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 075F083 (see Figure 10-4), and a big winning hole that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as the V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is equipped with a big winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this big winning opening door is connected to the back side and the front side of the pachinko game machine 1. By sliding horizontally between the slots to open and close, the path for the game ball to the V grand prize opening is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the OFF state, the big prize opening door slides toward the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V big prize opening, and the game ball enters the V big prize opening. (to pass) becomes impossible. On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the big prize opening door slides to the back of the pachinko game machine 1, opening the V big prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the V big winning opening. .

The game ball that enters the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024 (see Figure 10-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as the V winning area) provided inside the V big winning opening. . When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the gaming state is controlled to a variable probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V winning occurs on the condition that a game ball enters the V big winning opening during a round in a jackpot gaming state, and the gaming state is controlled to be in a variable probability state. . In addition, the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole are collectively referred to as the big winning hole. Also, the big winning opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko game machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the game board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes, in addition to a movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and an attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal big winning opening and the V big winning opening, there is also a movable body lamp 9d provided above the attacker. the lower left lamp 075F009D provided on the lower left of the game board 2; the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5; Equipped with panel left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d displays characters attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko game machine 1, in this example) by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED when the movable body 32 is in a stopped state or in an operating state. “XXX”) is emitted. The attacker lamp 9c causes the vicinity of the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U causes the area above the attacker to emit light by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D lights up the lower left area of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The panel right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a casing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the casing imitating a character on the right side of the image display device 5 emits light. . The panel left lamp 075F009E lights up the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. Note that the board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a casing imitating a character, similar to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the board right lamp 075F009F and the board left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (such as the left-right direction or the up-down direction), similarly to the movable lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. Equipped with.

Here, FIG. 10-2 is an explanatory diagram showing the frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has a group of 11 lamps, from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp, running counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to illuminate the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups from the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights up or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example), respectively, to cause the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to emit light.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a special map LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the game board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and is shown in FIG. This is a board that plays the roles of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LEDs. Further, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies changes in special symbols, the number of reserved memories, right-handed display, etc. by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the LED.

Here, FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the fourth pattern unit 075F050. As shown in Figure 10-3(a), the special figure LED board 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display part 075F021 that shows the variable display of the first special figure, and a special figure 2 variable display part that shows the variable display of the second special figure. A display section 075F022, a special figure 1 memory display section 075F023 that shows the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special figure game, and a special figure 2 memory display section that shows the second reserved memory number that corresponds to the second special figure game. 075F024, a normal pattern memory display section 075F025 that shows the number of stored normal patterns, a normal pattern display section 075F026 that shows a variable display of the normal pattern, a right-based pattern display section 075F030 that prompts the player to play right, and a probability variable state. A probability change display section 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, a time saving display section 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time saving state, and a round display section 075F027 indicating the number of rounds of jackpots. Each display section can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special symbols and regular symbols, the results thereof, the current gaming status, the number of reservations, etc. by lighting or blinking using lighting means such as LEDs. can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means.

Furthermore, the special figure LED board 075F020 can encourage the player to play right-handed by lighting/blinking/extinguishing the lighting means such as LED in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030. In this embodiment, when the player is urged to play right-handed, the lighting means such as an LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 lights up (lights up), and when the player is not encouraged to play right-handed, That is, when urging the player to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120, and lights up the right-handed display section 075F030, and after the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-hand hit display light-off designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120, and the right-hand hit display section 075F030 is turned off. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the production control CPU 120, and turns off the right hit display section 075F030.

Here, hitting right means firing the game ball toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. This is how to operate the ball hitting operation handle 30 (how to hit the ball). The first downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the left side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, while the variable winning ball device This is a route in which the second starting prize opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second downstream route is, for example, a route that passes through the right side area of the gaming area, and beyond that there is a second starting winning opening and a big winning opening (usually a big winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V big prize opening) exists. When a player fires a game ball toward the first downstream path, the game ball flows toward the first starting prize opening through the first downstream path. When a player launches a game ball toward the second downstream path, the game ball passes through the second downstream path and is directed toward the second starting prize opening or the grand prize opening (normal grand prize opening, V grand prize opening). flows into. In this embodiment, in a jackpot game after a jackpot occurs, and in a gaming state (time saving state or variable probability state) after a jackpot game, when the player hits right, a The game ball is made to enter the second starting winning hole or the big winning hole, and during that time, the right-handed display section 075F030 urges the player to hit the right-handed ball. By hitting right while a display prompting the player to hit right, the player enters the game ball into the second starting prize opening and a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls can be paid out by entering the game ball into the normal big prize opening. Furthermore, as will be described in detail later, the V-big prize opening will be open during the round of the probability jackpot, but the player can win the V-big prize by hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right. It is also possible to obtain the right to be controlled in a variable probability state by entering a game ball into the winning hole. For this reason, the player can gain an overall advantage by hitting the ball to the right while a display prompting the player to hit the ball to the right is displayed. Note that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path (hitting method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 10-3(b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 has a special symbol 1 memory display section 075F051 indicating the number of first reserved memories corresponding to the first special symbol game, and a special symbol unit 075F051 corresponding to the second special symbol game. A special figure 2 memory display section 075F052 indicating the number of second reserved memories to be stored, a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and a special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 indicating the variable display status or display result of the second special figure. It includes a special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 that shows the display result, and a right-hitting display section 075F055 that urges the player to play right-handed. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of special symbols, the number of reservations, right-handed instruction, etc. by lighting/flashing/turning off the lights using lighting means such as LEDs.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display section 075F053 determines whether or not the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being variably displayed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by lighting/flashing/turning off the light using lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 determines whether or not the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being displayed in a variable manner, and displays the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined based on the result of the variable display using an LED or the like. The player is notified by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means. Below, representing the variation of the stop symbols of the first special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is also referred to as a variation display of the first special symbol. In addition, representing the variation of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by lighting means such as LED in the special figure 2 variable display section 075F054 is also referred to as a variable display of the second special symbol.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when urging the player to play right, the lighting means such as an LED in the right play display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and prompts the player to play right. If the player is not prompted to play left-handed, that is, if the player is encouraged to play left-handed, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display section 075F055 is turned off. After the symbol is determined, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103, and the symbol is determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed player display unit 075F055 is turned off based on receiving a right-handed player display light-off designation command from the CPU 103. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small win that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game ball state, the performance control CPU 120 may light the right hit display section 075F055 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right hit display section 075F055 based on receiving the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 10-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 10-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L. , is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (flashing) under the control of the performance control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. In addition, each of these movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, and frame left lamp 075F009L, or these together in the game. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the production control board 12, and can light up (blink) each display section under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special figure LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display section can be lit (flashing) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 10-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as a variable display of decorative symbols and a reach effect. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first pending memory display area 075F005D in which the first pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays, and a second pending memory number can be displayed by the number of circular pending displays. A second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second reserved storage display area 075F005U is configured.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a third display area 075F005Sb including a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, a display of the first pending memory number, and a display of the second pending memory number. are doing.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 075F005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. The small pattern 075F005M is also a pattern that is always displayed within the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5 without being hidden during variable display.

As shown in FIG. 10-5, a decorative pattern is arranged at the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 075F005M is located at the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a smaller size than the decorative pattern in the section. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Further, at the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A is provided for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-8.

(Jackpot type)
FIG. 10-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in Figure 10-6, in the hit type table, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state , and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, the types of jackpots are 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Note that, hereinafter, each round may be denoted by "R". For example, the first round is also called the 1R, and the second round is also called the 2R. 5R normal jackpot is a case where the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a prize (for example, a control pattern that makes it difficult to win the V jackpot (for example, a control that shortens the time for opening and closing the lid to open and close the V jackpot or a lid). This is a control to prevent the game ball from entering a specific area by repeating opening and closing of the game ball, etc.), and the jackpot is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the completion of 5 rounds of jackpot game state. Normally, in the case of a jackpot, the condition that such a low probability high base state is maintained until the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times, 100 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

5R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win V (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

10R fixed variable jackpot is a control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V big prize opening, or control to open the lid at a specific time). This is a jackpot that is controlled to be in a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the case of a variable probability jackpot, the condition that such a high probability high base state is maintained until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, 150 times, or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever comes first, is satisfied. Continue until.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed variable jackpot have a common decorative pattern that stops when the jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R fixed strange jackpot have the same fanfare performance (for example, background, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) that is performed when a jackpot occurs, and during the round in the jackpot game state. The performance aspects of the round performances (for example, backgrounds, appearing characters, sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and furthermore, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether a 5R normal jackpot or a 5R probability variable jackpot has occurred, as long as the player sees the stopped decorative symbols, the fanfare performance, and the round performance. Here, in the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the V big prize opening opens in a predetermined round (4th R in this embodiment). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state.

In this way, the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot are also referred to as chance bonuses because it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the probability variable jackpot has occurred until the middle of the round.

As for the 10R variable probability jackpot, similarly to the 5R variable probability jackpot, the V grand prize opening is opened in the predetermined round (in the present embodiment, the 9th round). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-big winning hole by hitting the ball to the right while aiming at the V-big winning hole, the gaming state is controlled to be a variable probability state. However, in the case of a 10R guaranteed variable jackpot, the decorative patterns that stop when the jackpot occurs, the production aspects of the fanfare production (for example, the background, characters that appear, sound effects, etc.), and the round production that takes place during the round of the jackpot game state. The performance mode is different from that of the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability-variable jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variable jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that a probability variable jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability-variable jackpot is also called a special bonus.

(each random number)
FIG. 10-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in Figure 10-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for determining whether or not to win a jackpot. The random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is added and updated from 0 to the upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for jackpot type determination) that determines the jackpot type as one of 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of variation pattern) that determines the type of variation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining a fluctuation pattern) that determines a fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for normal symbol hit determination) that determines whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol. Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of Random 4 (for determining the initial value of Random 4).

In the present embodiment, it is determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. Then, out of the multiple types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10R probability variable jackpot as the jackpot game state, which jackpot is to be determined is based on the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type. It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, a variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern type determination (Random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is determined using a random number for variation pattern determination (Random 4). is determined. In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. The variation pattern type is a grouping of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of their variation modes. One or more variation patterns belong to the variation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns are classified into a normal reach variation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach variation pattern type with super reach. Such variation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. In addition, in the case of a loss, it is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, a normal reach variation pattern type, and a super reach variation pattern type.

For such fluctuation pattern types, when the display result is a loss, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different depending on whether the display result is in a time-saving state or not. Therefore, when the time is in the time-saving state, the rate of selection of the variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be high. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

In addition, such a variation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio is different depending on when the number of reserved memories of each special symbol to be displayed as a variation is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, and when it is less than a predetermined number. When the number of pending memories for each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, execution of pending number reduction control is performed in which the variable display time is shortened compared to when the number of pending memories for each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may also do so. For example, in the pending number reduction control state, the rate of selection of a variation pattern type with a short variation display time, such as the normal variation pattern type, is set to be higher than in the non-retention number reduction control state. , the average time of the variable display time may be made shorter than when the number of reservations is not in the hold count reduction control state. Further, in the reservation number reduction control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be made shorter than when the reservation number reduction control is not in the state.

Further, the variation pattern may be determined not by a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined, but also by a one-stage determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery.

(Jackpot determination table, jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 10-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 10-8(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the RO 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability variable) jackpot determination table that is used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability variable state, that is, a non-probability variable state), and a probability variable jackpot determination table that is used in a probability variable state.

In the normal jackpot judgment table, each numerical value listed in the left column of Figure 10-8 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value, and in the probability change jackpot judgment table, the values listed in the left column of Figure 10-8 (B) are set as jackpot judgment values. Each numerical value listed in the column is set as a jackpot determination value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at variable probability is the same jackpot judgment value as the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table (referred to as the normal jackpot judgment value or the first jackpot judgment value). By adding the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number of jackpot judgment values (referred to as variable probability jackpot judgment values or second jackpot judgment values) are set than in the variable probability jackpot judgment table. As a result, in the variable probability state, it is determined that the jackpot is hit with a higher probability than in the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R). ), it is determined that the special symbol will be a jackpot (normal jackpot or variable probability jackpot). Note that the "probability" shown in FIG. 10-8(A) indicates the probability (ratio) of hitting the jackpot.

FIGS. 10-8(B) and (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 10-8(B) is a first special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the first special symbol. FIG. 10-8(C) is a second special symbol jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot is determined based on the second special symbol.

The first special figure jackpot type determination table in FIG. 10-8(B) includes numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, including "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variable jackpot", and , "10R probability variable jackpot" and corresponding jackpot determination values are set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C), a jackpot determination value is set which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1 and corresponds to "10R probability variable jackpot".

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-8 (B) and (C), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) for determining the jackpot symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It will be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "5R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "3". The determination value corresponding to the "10R probability variable jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to the jackpot symbol "7". The special pattern 1 variable display section 075F021 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 075F022 on the special pattern LED board 075F020 display the stopped jackpot pattern by lighting means such as LEDs lighting up or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot pattern. can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display part 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display part 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting means such as LEDs lighting or blinking in the lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. It is possible to show the jackpot symbol.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines, as the jackpot type, the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines, as the jackpot symbol, the type that corresponds to the jackpot type judgment value with which the value of Random 1 matches. Determine the jackpot symbol. Thereby, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, regarding the jackpot of the second special symbol, the percentage of selection of "10R probability variable jackpot" is higher than that of the jackpot type selectable with the first special symbol, and the player There is a high rate of selection of jackpot types that are advantageous for players.

(Production control command)
FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various performance control commands to the performance control CPU 120 depending on the game control state. The production control command has, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-9 is an example, and other command formats may be used. In addition, although "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number in the following, it may be omitted in this specification.

Command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special figure. Command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special figure. When the production control CPU 101 receives the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 81XX(H) is a variation pattern command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of special symbols (each corresponds to variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the game has been determined to be a loss. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 5R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variable jackpot designation command) indicating that a 10R probability variable jackpot has been determined. Each of the loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variable jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variable jackpot designation command, or these commands collectively are also referred to as 8C series commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating to start variable display of the second special symbol. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D series commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command that designates ending the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization designation command that designates initialization (designates displaying the initial screen when the power is turned on) to be sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery designation command that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed and designates recovery from a power outage (specifies displaying a power outage recovery screen). Command 9500 (H) is a normal state designation command that designates the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state designation command that designates the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a variable probability state designation command that specifies the background of the variable probability state. Each of the normal state designation command, time-saving state designation command, and variable probability state designation command, or these commands collectively, are also referred to as 95-series commands or background designation commands. Command 9F00(H) is a customer waiting demonstration designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that designates the start of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that designates the start of a 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A003 (H) is a probability variable jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of a 10R probability variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designation command, the jackpot start 2 designation command, and the jackpot start 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX(H) is a command indicating that the big winning hole is being opened for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The grand prize opening designation command is also referred to as the A1 series command. A2XX(H) is a specified command after the opening of the grand prize opening indicating the closing of the grand prize opening of the number (round) indicated by XX. The command specified after opening the big prize opening is also referred to as the A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that designates the end of the 5R normal jackpot. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that designates the end of the 5R probability variable jackpot. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that designates the end of the 10R variable jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designation command, the jackpot end 2 designation command, and the jackpot end 3 designation command, or these collectively are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a probability change determination device passage designation command that designates that a V winning has occurred. The probability change determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V big winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

Command B100 (H) is a first starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a first starting winning. Command B200 (H) is a second starting winning designation command that specifies that there is a second starting winning.

Command C1XX(H) is a first pending storage number designation command that specifies that the first pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second pending storage designation command that specifies that the second pending storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second pending storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2-based command.

Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as jackpot judgment, jackpot type judgment, fluctuation pattern type judgment, etc. at the time of starting winning into the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole. This is the production control command shown. Among these, command C4XX(H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not it will be a jackpot among the winning determination results and the determination result of the type of jackpot. In addition, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command that indicates the judgment result (variation pattern type judgment result) in which judgment value range the value of the random number for variation pattern type judgment falls within among the winning judgment results. It is.

C7XX(H) is a grand prize opening designation command that indicates passage of the game ball to the grand prize opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which the MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed player display light-off designation command indicating that the right-handed player display is turned off. A command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1 is a right-handed hitting display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed hitting display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD-related command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines, at the time of starting winning, whether or not there will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and which judgment value range the value of the random number for determining the type of variation pattern falls within. Then, a value that specifies a jackpot and a value that specifies the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit them to the performance control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value specifying the range of the determination value as a determination result of the fluctuation pattern type in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and performs control to send it to the performance control CPU 120. The production control CPU 120 can recognize whether the display result is a jackpot or not and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and can also recognize the variation pattern type based on the variation type command. .

[motion]
Next, the operation (effect) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be explained.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 10-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 10-10, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 stores the first pending memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing pending memory information of the first special symbol) or the second pending memory buffer (the second special symbol). It is determined whether or not there is pending storage data in the storage buffer for storing pending storage information of symbols (step 075FS001). If there is no pending storage data in either the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether a predetermined period of time has passed since the fluctuation was stopped (step 075FS002). If the predetermined period has not elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is ended. On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the fluctuation stopped (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is ended. Here, when the customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when executing the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled so that the waiting demo specification command is not sent. Such a customer waiting demonstration designation command sent flag is reset when the next variable display of special symbols starts.

When there is pending storage data in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 determines that the first data among the data set in the pending specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether it is data (step 075FS004). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is not data indicating "second" (that is, data indicating "first") (N in step 075FS004), CPU 103 moves the special symbol pointer (second Data indicating "first" is set in a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol (step 075FS005). If the first data set in the reservation specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of symbols is executed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the first pending storage buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the pending storage data stored in the second pending storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second pending memory exists in the second pending memory buffer, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second pending memory is This is executed in priority to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data of the first pending memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = 1 in the first pending storage buffer. is read out and stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = 1 in the second pending storage buffer. The data is stored in the pending storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending storage number counter, and adds the value of each storage area in the first pending storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores data in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n (n=2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each of the items stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage buffer of the RAM 102 The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a pending memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the pending memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction ( Step 075FS009). In this case, if a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first pending storage number designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a second pending storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the pending storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process of comparing a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 10-8) and a jackpot determination random number, and determining that it is a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is variable probability state (high probability state), the probability of hitting the jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is non-probable variable state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, there is a jackpot determination table in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance (the table in which the numbers on the right side of Figure 10-8 (A) are set), and a table in which a large number of jackpot determination values is set in advance. A normal jackpot determination table (table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 10-8(A) are set) is provided, which is set smaller than the regular jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the gaming state is in a variable probability state, and when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the CPU 103 performs processing to determine a jackpot using the variable probability jackpot determination table, and when the gaming state is normal. When the game is in the state or the time saving state, the jackpot judgment process is performed using the normal jackpot judgment table. That is, when the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 10-8(A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 075FS011), the process moves to step 075FS012. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a jackpot means deciding whether to move to a jackpot gaming state, but also deciding whether to make a stop symbol in a special symbol a jackpot symbol. .

It should be noted that confirmation of whether the current gaming state is a variable probability state is performed based on whether or not a variable probability flag is set. The variable probability flag is set when the gaming state is transferred to a variable probability state, and is reset when the variable probability state is ended. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times), or the condition that the next jackpot has been determined. It is reset at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol ends and the stop symbol is stopped and displayed when the earlier condition is satisfied.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match any jackpot determination value (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016, which will be described later.

If the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R) matches any jackpot determination value in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step 075FS012). Note that the jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. The first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(C) are used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types. Select one of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-8(B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 10-8(C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for jackpot type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, and uses the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013 to determine the pending winnings. The jackpot type and jackpot symbol corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in Figures 10-8(B) and (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol is different for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot pattern and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variable jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variable jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol as a special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, a "-" which is a losing symbol is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variable jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variable jackpot", "7" is determined as the special symbol stopping symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIGS. 10-11 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the variation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines a variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table. Select the type determination table. Then, the CPU 103 reads Random 2 (a random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) from the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer, and selects one of the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns by referring to the selected table. decided on.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send the symbol variation designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special pattern variation processing)
FIG. 10-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 10-11, in the special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), the CPU 103 changes the value of the special symbol process flag. It is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (Step 075FS203). If the variable time timer has not timed out (N at step 075FS202), the process is ended.

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIG. 10-13 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 10-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 or the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbols (step 075FS301). In addition, if the data indicating "1st" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the 1st special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display section 075F021 is ended, and "2nd" is indicated in the special symbol pointer. If the data has been set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display section 075F022 is ended. Further, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, a symbol confirmation designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N at step 075FS303), the process moves to step 075FS309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right hit display lighting command are transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, with reference to the opening pattern data stored in the RO101, the number of openings (for example, 5 times or 10 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds for the regular big winning hole and the V big winning hole. Data indicating the opening mode such as the interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability-variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big prize opening in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round and opening the V big winning opening in the 4th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a 10R variable jackpot, opening modes such as opening the normal big winning hole in the 1st to 8th and 10th rounds and opening the V big winning hole in the 9th round are stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Data on the number of openings (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening number counter for counting the number of openings.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (for example, the time when the occurrence of the jackpot is announced on the image display device 5) which is the jackpot display time is set in the jackpot control timer (step 075FS307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the jackpot opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it becomes 0, the jackpot opening is opened and a round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the process is ended.

If it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is set (step 075FS309). . If the time saving flag is not set (N at step 075FS309), the process moves to step 075FS316. If the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time saving number counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time saving state has ended, and the time saving flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, when a variable display that results in a loss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts from the time saving state to the non-time saving state. In step 075FS311, if the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS311), the process moves to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether a variable probability flag indicating a variable probability state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability variation flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability variation flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 in response to the transition of the gaming state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (step 075FS315), and proceeds to step 075FS316. move on. If the probability variation flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process in step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS316), and the process ends.

(Jackpot release preprocessing)
FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot release preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 10-14, in the jackpot release preprocessing, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the big winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process is ended.

When the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command for specifying the opening of the big winning opening is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st round.

Next, based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 in step 075FS306), the CPU 103 sets the big winning opening control timer to the maximum time that the big winning opening can be opened (big winning opening opening time). The corresponding big prize opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening process. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 updates the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the big prize opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the big prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process moves to step 075FS511. When the value of the big winning hole control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open can be determined based on the value of the opening number counter.

In step 075FS503, if it is determined that the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal big winning hole or the V big winning hole is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is +1 (updated and updated) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The variable probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that control is to be performed in a variable probability state when a V winning occurs. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process moves to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device passage designation command is sent (step 075FS509), and the process moves to step 075FS510. do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning prize counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning prize counter does not reach the predetermined value (N at step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the number of winnings counter reaches a predetermined value (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 drives the solenoid 82 to close the normal big winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to close the V big winning opening. (Step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs processing to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning prize counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the process.

(Post-processing after jackpot release)
FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot release post-processing. As shown in FIG. 10-16, in the jackpot release post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the release number counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the opening number counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), a jackpot end designation command is sent to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (indicating that the jackpot game has ended) is sent to the big winning opening control timer. For example, a value corresponding to the time to be notified on the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process end.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the number of openings counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a command specified after opening the big winning opening is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS605), and the round is set in the big winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the round before the V big prize opening is opened (also referred to as the V opening round), that is, the next round is the V opening round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal big prize opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 075F083 to open the V big prize opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a special winning opening designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 10-17 is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot termination processing. As shown in FIG. 10-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer to which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the big prize opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the jackpot flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step 075FS704). If the probability variation determination flag is not set (N at step 075FS704), the process moves to step 075FS705. In step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS704), a probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), a probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process moves to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and a time saving number counter is set to 150 (step 075FS711). Then, the process moves to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, a time-saving flag indicating that the time-saving state is in effect is set (step 075FS705), and a time-saving number counter is set to 100. (Step 075FS706), and the process moves to Step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 side can recognize whether the game is in a variable probability, time saving, or normal gaming state by a variable probability state designation command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Jackpot performance processing)
Next, processing by the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot production process. As shown in FIG. 10-18, in the jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the jackpot end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the performance control CPU 120 when the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121 stores data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received. It is deleted at a predetermined timing, such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, in accordance with the contents of the process data set next, control of the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed (step 075FS657). For example, the performance control CPU 120 reads image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data, and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display an image according to the performance during the round on the image display device 5. . In addition, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 to turn on/blink/turn off. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output audio, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), control of the production devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9, etc.) will continue according to the set process data. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 executes a process corresponding to the fanfare performance in order to execute the fanfare performance by controlling the performance device. Set the data. Furthermore, when the production control CPU 120 receives a right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the production control CPU 120 displays the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 in order to encourage the player to play right. Turn on a lighting means such as an LED.

In addition, when the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A1 series command) specifying that the jackpot is open from the CPU 103 at the start of each round of the jackpot, the production control CPU 120 executes the production during the round by controlling the production device as follows. In order to do so, process data corresponding to the performance during the round is set.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives the big prize opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion production that suggests whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set process data. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R normal jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102 A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the production control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) specifying that the big winning hole is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the production control CPU 120 generates process data for executing the V probability variation suggestion production (see Figure 10-41). Set. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A102). A jackpot round (in this case, 2R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V probability variable suggestion performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) specifying that the big prize opening is open from the CPU 103 at the start of 3R of the 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 for performance control receives a V notice that foretells that the next 4R will be the V opening round. Set process data to execute the effect (see Figure 10-42). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A103). A jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 3R), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, a V preview performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after opening the big winning hole (A203 command) from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the effect (see Figure 10-43) to aim for V. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot after opening the jackpot opening designation command (A203 The finished jackpot round (in this case, 3R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) after the round during the specified jackpot is set. The Aim for V effect is a guidance display using an image display related to the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the Aim for V effect, an image is displayed that urges the player to hit the ball to the right so as to fire the game ball aiming at the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. In the Aim for V effect, an image may be displayed that points to the V grand prize opening itself, which is a specific area, or an image may be displayed that points to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening, which is a specific area. , an image may be displayed that points to the route to the V grand prize opening, which is the specific area.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 4R of the 5R probability-variable jackpot, it continues to aim for V and executes the performance (see Figure 10-44). Set process data for At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 5R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A104). A jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (4R in this case), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) according to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening specifying command (A108 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 8th round of the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, the CPU 120 performs a V preview performance that foretells that the next 9th round will be the V opening round. Set process data for execution. At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A108 A jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, V preview performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a command after opening the big winning hole (A208 command) from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, the production control CPU 120 causes the game ball to enter the V big winning hole which is a specific area between rounds. Aim for the V that makes you want to do something. Set the process data to execute the effect. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the specification command after opening the jackpot (A208 The finished jackpot round (in this case, 8R) is specified based on the specified jackpot round (in this case, 8R), and process data for executing a corresponding performance (in this case, aim for V performance) is set.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a big prize opening designation command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability-variable jackpot, it sets process data for continuing to aim for V and execute the performance. . At this time, the production control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot) based on the jackpot start specification command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot type (in this case, 10R probability variable jackpot), and also specifies the jackpot opening specification command (A109). A jackpot round (in this case, 9R) is specified based on a command), and process data for executing a performance (in this case, an aim for V performance) corresponding to the round in the specified jackpot is set.

Furthermore, when the output control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passing designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the V winning prize control CPU 120 executes the V winning presentation by controlling the presentation device as follows. Set process data that corresponds to the performance.

When the performance control CPU 120 receives a probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning production (see FIG. 10-44). .

When the production control CPU 120 receives a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets process data for executing the V winning performance.

In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3-based command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 controls the ending performance (FIG. 10-46, FIG. -47)).

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103, and performs various operations. Execute the performance.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 075F configured as described above, the game progresses as follows. Furthermore, although the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F also has the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 that has already been explained, below, we will particularly explain the game of the part related to the feature section 075F. do.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward a first downstream path passing through the left side area of the game area. When the fired game ball enters the first starting prize opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display section 075F021 becomes a display mode showing the jackpot symbol, a jackpot occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include the 5R normal jackpot, the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed, and a right-hand-hitting promotion performance is also performed to urge the player to play right-handed. The effect to promote right-handed hitting includes characters (for example, "right-handed hitting") and figures (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second downstream path) that encourage right-handed hitting on the screen of the image display device 5. While displaying the image, right-handed hitting is encouraged by lighting means such as LEDs in the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As a result, the player will play right-handed from then on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variable jackpot, and 10 times in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot). One opening of the grand prize opening is the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big jackpot is opened only in the 4th round. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it difficult to win a V prize, a V prize will not be won. Furthermore, since the player does not win a V prize, the aim for V effect is not executed in the 4th round, and the same background image as in the 1st round is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened in the 1st and 2nd rounds, and in the 2nd round, a V probability variable suggestion performance that suggests whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, it is announced that it is not a probability variation jackpot but a normal jackpot. Thereafter, the V big prize opening is opened in the 4th round, but no V winning prize is generated, and the normal big prize opening is opened in the subsequent 5th round, and when the 5th round ends, an ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 5R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening will be opened in the 1st to 3rd rounds and the 5th round, but the V big winning opening will be opened only in the 4th round. Specifically, in the case of a 5R fixed-variable jackpot, the regular jackpot opens in the 1st and 2nd rounds, as with the 5R regular jackpot, and in the 2nd round, a V fixed-variable jackpot that indicates whether or not it is a fixed-variable jackpot is opened. Suggestive performance is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, a probability variation jackpot is announced. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 4th round will be a V open round. In the 4th R, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 5th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 5th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning opening is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability variable jackpot, the normal big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds, and in the 7th round, a V probability variable suggestion effect is executed to suggest whether or not it is a probability variable jackpot. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion performance, a probability variation jackpot is announced. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th round, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the jackpot game state is finished, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot, 150 times in the case of 5R probability variable jackpot and 10R probability variable jackpot). be done. Furthermore, in the case of a 5R variable probability jackpot and a 10R variable probability jackpot, and when a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state remains in a variable probability state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (150 times) that are controlled to be in a time saving state. controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a low probability high base state, and in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes a high probability high base state.

Even in the variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round, the image display device 5, the right-hand game display section 075F030, and the right-hand game display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-hand game promotion performance. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also referred to as the first hit) occurs, the player is always urged to play right-handed by the right-handed hitting promotion performance even in a time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the short time state, control is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the special symbol is varied) compared to the normal state, and the average regular symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the regular symbol is varied) is executed. Control is performed to shorten the period of time compared to the normal state, and furthermore, control is performed to improve the probability of "hitting the common drawing" in the common drawing game compared to the normal state. In addition, in the time saving state, by increasing the frequency of the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning hole being in the open state, the frequency at which game balls enter the second starting winning hole is increased, and the second starting winning hole is increased. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning into the winning opening (increase the number of entries, increase the frequency).

In the time saving state after the jackpot round, the second special drawing game is started by the fired game ball entering the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display section 075F022 becomes a display mode showing the jackpot symbol, a jackpot (also referred to as a consecutive winning) occurs.

As described above, the type of jackpot in the second special figure game is the 10R probability variable jackpot. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare performance is performed. Note that the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continues from the time of the first hit.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the grand prize opening is the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two.

Since it is a 10R variable jackpot, the normal big winning hole is opened in the 1st to 8th rounds and the 10th round, but the V big winning hole is opened only in the 9th round. Specifically, similar to the first time winning, the regular big prize opening is opened in the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V preview effect is executed to foretell that the next 9th round will be a V open round. In the 9th round, when the V big prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V big prize opening is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, a V winning prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot round. After that, in the 10th round, the normal big prize opening is opened again, and when the 10th round ends, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending performance after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to be a time-saving state and a variable probability state (high probability high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times), similar to the first time the winning state. be done. Even in the variable probability state after the jackpot round in consecutive winnings, the image display device 5, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 continue to perform the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player may receive consecutive winnings in a variable probability state or time saving state after the end of the jackpot round, and the player may be in a variable probability state or time saving state after the jackpot round for the consecutive winnings has ended. Even in this state, the player is always encouraged to hit the ball to the right by the right-hand ball promotion performance.

The variable probability state or short time state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the variable probability state or short time state after the first jackpot round ends, or the variable probability state or short time state after the jackpot round for consecutive wins ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-handed hitting promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-handed hitting display section 075F030, and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 also ends. As a result, the player again hits the game ball to the left to launch the game ball toward the first downstream path passing through the left area of the game area.

[Timing chart of example of processing]
With reference to FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21, the timing of the main processes executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature section 075F will be explained. FIG. 10-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during winning fluctuations. FIG. 10-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during a jackpot. FIG. 10-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the jackpot ends. Note that FIGS. 10-19 to 10-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variable jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 10-19, at t1, when the first special figure game starts by the game ball entering the first starting prize opening, the CPU 103 sends a reservation memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120. (C1 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the first special symbol, or displays fluctuating performances (e.g., reach performance, preview performance, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuation in the first special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

For example, the production control CPU 120 specifies the first pending memory number based on the pending memory number designation command, and updates the display of the first pending memory display area 075F005D, or changes the lighting mode of the special figure 1 memory display section 075F051. or update it. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the gaming state being controlled based on the background designation command, and controls the image display device 5 to display a background image corresponding to the gaming state. Further, the performance control CPU 120 specifies that the special symbol will start changing based on the symbol change designation command, and sets the start timing of the performance. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 specifies the presence or absence of a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the display result designation command, and determines a decorative pattern accordingly. Furthermore, based on the variation pattern designation command, the performance control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern (such as the presence or absence of reach), and the performance content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach (type of performance, etc.).

Thereafter, when the variation of the special symbols stops at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a jackpot occurs as a result of stopping the variation of the special symbols, at the subsequent t3, the CPU 103 issues a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the fanfare performance, and lights up lighting means such as an LED in the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, as a fanfare performance, the production control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image congratulating the jackpot, or outputs a sound congratulating the jackpot from the speakers 8L and 8R. Set process data for In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image that encourages right-handed hitting, and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a sound that encourages right-handed hitting, as a right-handed promoting performance.

As shown in FIG. 10-20, when the jackpot round starts at t4, the CPU 103 opens the normal jackpot and sends a command (A101 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the jackpot is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the performance during the round in the 1R.

After that, when the 1st round ends at t5, the CPU 103 closes the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A201 command) to specify after opening the grand prize opening to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 2nd round starts at t6, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the during-round performance in the 2nd round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability change suggestion performance (see FIG. 10-41) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A102 command).

Thereafter, when the 2nd round ends at t7, the CPU 103 closes the normal grand prize opening and transmits a command after opening the grand prize opening (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 3rd round starts at t8, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and sends a special winning hole opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 3rd round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V preview performance (see FIG. 10-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A103 command).

After that, when the 3rd round ends at t9, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning opening and transmits a special winning opening after opening designation command (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the inter-round performance between rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the Aim for V effect (see FIG. 10-43) based on the specified command after opening the grand prize opening (A203 command).

As shown in FIG. 10-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 opens the normal grand prize opening and sends a command (A104 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify that the grand prize opening is open. Send. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round performance in the 4th round. For example, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V preview performance (see Figure 10-42) based on the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command), and then executes the Aim for V performance (see Figure 10-43). Set process data for execution.

After that, when a V winning occurs at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V winning performance (see FIG. 10-44).

After that, when the 4th round ends at t12, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and transmits a special winning hole opening designation command (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, when the 5th round starts at t13, the CPU 103 opens the normal big winning hole and transmits a big winning hole opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the in-round effect in the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th round ends at t14, the CPU 103 closes the normal big winning hole and sends a command after opening the big winning hole (A205 command) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the ending effect.

Thereafter, it is controlled to a variable probability state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), but in this state, the CPU 103 changes the production control command depending on whether the number of pending memories exceeds 0 or not.

For example, at t16, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command to the production control CPU 120, if the number of pending memories exceeds 0. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating performances (for example, ready-to-reach performances, preview performances, etc.) in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol. ) to set the process data to execute.

On the other hand, if the number of pending memories does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration performance (see FIG. 10-60) that can specify that no game is being played. For example, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display an image with an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative pattern or a small pattern, or stops the output of sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Note that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the form shown in FIG. Any type of performance may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 10-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the lighting mode of the lamp. In this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L) , the right-handed display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off in a blacked-out manner as shown in FIG. 10-22(A). Expressed as

In addition, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are illuminated by white painting as shown in Figure 10-22 (B). It is expressed in the form of

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game effect lamps 9 (movable lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-hand display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 light up/flash/blink in a manner according to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by hatching as shown in FIG. 10-22(C).

[Production mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be explained. FIGS. 10-23 to 10-33 and FIGS. 10-38 to 10-50 are explanatory diagrams showing performance modes of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during a game.

As shown in FIG. 10-23(a), when the losing symbols stop due to the change in the special symbols of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stopping of the losing symbols. After that, if there is a first pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command) to the performance control CPU 120. ), a display result designation command (8C series command), and a variation pattern designation command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with fluctuations in the first special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). Note that the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-23 (b1) to 10-24 (b3) as a reservation memory number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-23 (b1) to FIG. 10-24 (b3) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol. In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-23 (b2), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect.

Thereafter, when the special symbols stop changing, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-24 (b3), when a jackpot occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 and a right-hand hit display light-up. Send a command (FD-related command). On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights up the lighting means such as the LED in the right-hand display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 inputs the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-24 (c1) to 10-38 (d2) into a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) and a right hit display lighting command (FD series command). Set based on. In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-38 (d2) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

Here, the fanfare performance will be explained in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare performance includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed driving promotion part. The blessing part is a performance part in which a performance to congratulate the jackpot is performed, and as described later in FIG. 10-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes to a lighting mode congratulating the jackpot. The name display part is a production part that not only informs the player that a jackpot round has started by notifying the name of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred, but also informs the player of the type of jackpot gaming state that has occurred, and is shown in FIG. -24 (c2) and (c3), as described later, a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. The right-handed driving promotion part is a performance part that encourages the player to play right-handed, and uses text and graphic image displays as described later in Figures 10-24 (c4) to 10-33 (c29). A big right-handed hitting promotion performance is performed to encourage the player to hit right-handed. The performance control CPU 120 receives a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol stops and the symbol is determined, and then receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , the fanfare performance is started, and the fanfare is executed until the normal jackpot is opened and the jackpot round starts.

As shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!") is displayed as a celebration part in the fanfare performance. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that it is displayed on the device 5, a sound congratulating the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. or In addition, as a performance to promote right-handed hitting, a small image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed") is displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5 to promote right-handed hitting. The performance is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and can display a predetermined image in each layer. As shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion performance is an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and "Congratulations!!") character image) is displayed in a layer on the front side (in the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko gaming machine 1 side). In addition, in the fanfare performance, a sound that encourages right-handed batting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and as a performance to promote right-handed batting, the lighting modes of right-handed batting display section 075F030 and right-handed batting display section 075F055 are designed to encourage right-handed batting. (in this example, it lights up). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display, lighting, etc. is as follows. First, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0-based command) and a right-hitting display lighting command (FD-based command), and lights up the right-hitting display section 075F030. The production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed display section 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD-based command), and at the same time lights up the small-right-based hitting promotion production based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0-based command). An image consisting of figures and characters in , and an image congratulating the jackpot are displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the image consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect located closer to the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the player on hitting the jackpot. In other words, first, the lamps light up in the order of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055, and then an image consisting of figures and letters to promote small right-handed hitting, and an image congratulating the jackpot. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of images consisting of figures and letters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the lighting in the right-handed display section 075F030 and the right-handed display section 075F055, determine the symbol by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. will be carried out until At this time, first, after determining the symbol, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display light-off designation command along with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display section 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-hander display section 075F055 based on the received right-hander display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-hander promotion effect based on the received background designation command. Upon completion, the background image in the normal state is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed driving promotion effect matches the lighting period of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055, so that the player can control the right-handed hitting period. becomes easier to understand.

As shown in Figure 10-24 (c2), part of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred (in this example, one of the character images of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is used as the name display part in the fanfare performance. "CHANCE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, a sound corresponding to the start of a jackpot is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of a jackpot. The lighting mode may change.

As shown in Figure 10-25 (c3), following Figure 10-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image (in this example Among the character images of "CHANCE BONUS!!", "BONUS!!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the big right-handed hitting promotion performance to be executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance starting at the next timing. After that, from Figure 10-24 (c4) to Figure 10-33 (c29), a figure (in this example, an arrow pointing to the right) and text (in this example, the words "Right-handed player") are used to promote right-handed players. ) is displayed in a large size at the center of the image display device 5 to promote a big right-handed hit.

Here, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table shown in FIGS. 10-34 to 10-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table, the performance control CPU 120 emits a guide light to prompt the player to hit the ball to the right by moving the light emitting location of the frame lamp. In this embodiment, a light-emitting location literally refers to a location that emits light. For example, among a plurality of lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lit lamp is located is called a light-emitting location; A location where a lamp that is not lit (that is, a lamp that is turned off) is located is not called a light emitting location. In other examples, a light-emitting location refers to a location that emits light with high brightness; for example, among multiple lamps included in a frame lamp, a location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. A location where a lamp that is lit at a luminance lower than the luminance of a lamp located at the light emitting location is located may not be referred to as a light emitting location. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the performance control CPU 120 will be specifically explained.

FIG. 10-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in Figure 10-34, the parent table in the lighting data table includes frame lamps (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, panel left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the performance time of each of the fanfare performance and the big right hitting promotion performance is defined. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec, and then executes a big right hit promotion effect for 2000 msec. In addition, since the big right-handed hit promotion performance is configured to be repeated multiple times (twice in this embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 repeats the 2000 msec big right-handed hit promotion performance twice. Become.

FIG. 10-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIG. 10-35, in the child table of the lighting data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is subdivided into each time of the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect, and is referenced in each time period. A grandchild table is specified.

Here, regarding the big right-handed driving promotion effect, the common grandchild table W11 is designated for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. Regarding the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the big right-handed hit promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of grandchild tables in the lighting data table. FIG. 10-36 shows data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIG. 10-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all the lamps are Data indicating that the light is off (0x000000) is specified. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 10-2 are defined for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. In addition, in Figure 10-36, in order to clearly indicate the lighting period for each lamp included in the frame lamp, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are used. In contrast, a dashed circle is attached.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table W11, first the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T1, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T2, and then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit at T3. The second lamp is lit, then at T4 the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is lit, then at T5 the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, then at T6 the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. The lamp lights up, then at T7 the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T8 the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up, then at T9 the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. Then, at T10, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is first turned off at T46, then the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T47, and then the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L turns off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then At T52, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T53 the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, then at T54 the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then at T55. The seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T56 the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used to turn on the light is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec left, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final turn off time is 1000 msec (which is longer than the remaining time). T57). Note that the first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the left frame lamp 075F009L and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the right frame lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If you use the grandchild table W11 in which the data described above is stored, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), starting from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L. , up to the 8th lamp of frame right lamp 075F009R, the frame lamps light up in seven colors in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 10-37 shows data in grandchild table K11 for movable lamp 9d and grandchild tables A11a to A11c for attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is defined at intervals of 30 msec from T1 to T56, and furthermore, at the final time of 1000 msec (T57), all RGB data is specified. Data indicating that the lamp is turned off (0x000000) is specified. In addition, in the grandchild table K11, regarding the movable body lamp 9d, among the letters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X) Data is specified for each of the following. In addition, in FIG. 10-37, in order to clearly show the lighting period for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, data (F00) at the timing to start lighting and data (000) at the timing to end lighting are shown. ) is marked with a dashed circle.

Referring to the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is lit at T4, and then the movable lamp 9d is turned on at T5. The lamp on the right X of 9d lights up. After starting to light up, each lamp continues to light up while changing colors into seven colors. After that, the left X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is first turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Lights out. Thereafter, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right-handed hit promotion performance. Note that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and continue to be turned off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec has elapsed in one big right hit promotion performance is about 320 msec. In other words, since the time used to turn on the light is 30 msec x 56 = 1680 msec, there is only about 320 msec left, but in order to ensure that the remaining time is turned off, the final turn off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. (T57). Furthermore, compared to the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable lamp 9d starts to light up later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off) and goes out earlier than the frame lamp.

By using the grandchild table K11 in which the data described above is stored, the fourth and third lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L are While the movable lamp 9d is lit, the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the left X of the movable lamp 9d lights up at the same timing as the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up, and then the middle X and right X lamps turn on. When lit, each lamp continues to light up in seven colors, and at the same timing that the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, the left X of the movable lamp 9d goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Lights out. As a result, the movable lamps 9d light up in seven colors starting from the left X lamp, then the middle X lamp, and then the right X lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side. Such a large right-handed hit promotion effect using the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 10-37 shows data in grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 10-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600,000 msec compared to 330 msec for lighting, and that data is for turning off the light. Data (0x000000) is defined.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec for 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats color changes in a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b specifies only 280 nsec for one pattern color change. ing. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the attacker lamp 9c for 280 ns each time it refers to the grandchild table A11b once in 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec and performs a predetermined Repeating color changes in a pattern (for example, seven colors).

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600000 msec compared to 320 msec for lighting, and the data for turning off (0x000000) is specified. There is.

When the big right-handed promotion performance is started, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at 280 nsec intervals for 1350 msec. By referring to the table A11c multiple times, the attacker lamp 9c is caused to repeat a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) of color change, and then, by referring to the grandchild table A11c for the last 320 msec, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off. As a result, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and soon the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c lights up, then the frame lamps turn off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns off, and then the attacker lamp 9c will turn off. Such a big right hit promotion effect using the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

In addition, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the light goes out at the beginning, repeats a predetermined pattern of colors in the middle, and then goes out, the attacker lamp 9c is turned off three times. By creating a scenario in stages and repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for repeating the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle, there is no need to prepare data for all times from the beginning to the end of the 2000 msec lighting. , it is sufficient to prepare data only for the repeated portion. Therefore, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 10-25 (c4), the presentation mode of the big right-handed hitting promotion performance executed in the right-handed hitting promotion part of the fanfare performance will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4), the image display device 5 displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-25 (c5), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c6), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable lamp 9d, the left X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c7), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (c8), the image display device 5 further displays the tip of the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the panel right lamp 075F009F, the panel right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting up. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c15), on the image display device 5, a character image of "RIGHT" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp on the left side of the frame 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. Note that from then on, the attacker lamp 9c repeats turning on and turning off (that is, blinks). The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c16), on the image display device 5, the character image "RIGHT" continues to be displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp on the left side of the frame 075F009L is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-29 (c17), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the left X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c18), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Furthermore, the middle X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c19), on the image display device 5, a character image of "Right-handed" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the right X of the movable lamp 9d is also turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-30 (c20), on the image display device 5, a character image of "hit right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c21), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right-handed hitter" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c22), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Hit the right" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the panel right lamp 075F009F goes out. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c24), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. The speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25), on the image display device 5, a text image of "Right hit!!" is displayed superimposed on the arrow image pointing rightward. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Furthermore, the flashing attacker lamp 9c also turns off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. This completes the series of first big right-handed hit promotion effects.

As shown in FIG. 10-32 (c26), the second big right hit promotion performance starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamps 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In addition, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance. As a result, when transitioning to the jackpot round after the big right hitting promotion performance ends, the BGM (sound according to the background of the jackpot round) during the jackpot round and the sound in the big right hitting promotion performance will not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second big right hitting promotion performance, the game effect lamp 9 lights/blinks/extinguishes in the same manner as the first big right hitting promotion performance. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed hitting promotion performance uses larger text and graphic image displays than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance, and is a performance that encourages the player to play right-handed hitting in a manner that is more emphasized than the small right-handed hitting promotion performance. be. Therefore, by executing the big right-handed hit promotion performance during the fanfare performance, it is possible to encourage the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, in the first big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds (for example, a sound effect for right-handed hitting) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, thereby effectively appealing to the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed hitting, in the second big right-handed hitting promotion performance, the sound is not output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance, so the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that. can be prevented from interfering with

In addition, in the big right-handed driving promotion effect, arrow images and character images are displayed in a manner that gradually appears in stages, and moreover, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes to effectively encourage right-handed hitting. This effect is more flashy than the effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2) that displays the name image of the jackpot game state. For example, the character images in the big right-handed promotion effect appear one character at a time, but all the character images in the name image in the jackpot game state appear at once. Furthermore, regarding the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion performance, the character image in the name image of the jackpot game state is larger than all the character images. Furthermore, the execution time of the effect promoting a big right-handed hit is longer than the execution time of the effect displaying the name image. Thereby, after the name image of the jackpot game state is displayed and the player is informed of the jackpot, it is possible to notify the player by emphasizing right-handed hitting by the big right-handed promoting performance.

The attacker lamp 9c is the place that the player aims at when launching the game ball in order to actually carry the game ball, so it lights up in a flashy color that is easy for the player to recognize, such as seven colors, and also blinks. It is possible to make the player pay more attention to the target area. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color, such as seven colors, without blinking.

In the following example, the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability-variable jackpot occurs will be explained. Although the number of rounds is different for the 10R fixed-variable jackpot, other performance aspects are the same as for the 5R fixed-variable jackpot. Furthermore, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V preview performance and the V prize winning performance are not executed, but the other performance aspects are the same as the 5R probability-variable jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 10-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 goes out and the second big right-handed promotion effect ends, the switch to the jackpot round starts as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the arrow image and the character image "Right hit!!" fade out, resulting in a gradual decrease in visibility. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes completely white. Note that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed in the upper right corner of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-out. As described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command), a series of performance data up to the stage shown in FIG. 10-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-39 (d3) to 10-40 (e4) based on the large prize opening designation command (A101 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-39 (d3) to FIG. 10-40 (e4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from a state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. Note that the image promoting small right-handed shots displayed in the upper right of the screen remains displayed without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade in" and "fade out" will be specifically explained. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in image display called "transition." "Transition" is a transition inserted between the first cut (image) and the second cut (image) when the scene of the video changes from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It's about the effect. In addition to fade-ins and fade-outs, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade in" is an effect in which an image representing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, fade-in involves changing the transparency (also called transmittance) of an object (image) from a first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0). % or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, use 1 second between 0 and 1 second to gradually change the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 50%, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually lowered from 50% to 0% (second degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) to opaque, It is not a fade-in if it does not gradually change the rate) to a lower value. Note that when changing opacity (also referred to as opacity) rather than transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned % value is reversed. That is, in fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of an object (image) is changed from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree that is higher than the second degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, fade-out involves changing the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) from a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to a first degree higher than the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). %) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 seconds, Using the next 1 to 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree). On the other hand, a method that changes the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) to transparency, It is not a fade-out if the rate (rate) does not gradually increase. Note that when changing the opacity (opacity) rather than the transparency (transparency), in fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) to a second degree lower than the first degree (for example, 0% or 1%) over a predetermined period of time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparent By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% when the transparency (rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the text "Right hit!!" Make the image transparent in stages and make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d2), only the white image on the second layer of the screen located further back than the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. Then, as shown in Figure 10-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is reduced to 0%. By gradually lowering the background image to , the background image during the jackpot round becomes gradually opaque and easily visible (fade-in). As a result, the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer on the screen is shown to the player.

Note that as a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade." For example, cross-fading is achieved by fading out the first layer of a screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located further back than the first layer. , in appearance, is a method in which the first layer of the screen is shown and then the second layer of the screen is shown. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image that is always displayed on the second layer of the screen located on the back side is is shown once during the transition from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, which is different from a technique such as cross-fade.

In this embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the above-mentioned transition is executed, the image that promotes small right-handed hits displayed at the top right of the screen is not affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without being affected. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, the player cannot completely see the image promoting small right-handed shots, or the player The player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when the player can see the image promoting small right-handed hitting a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way, such as by On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in Figure 10-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in, as shown in Figure 10-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens. , a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Note that a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting BGM (sound corresponding to the background of the jackpot round) in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round. Note that, as described above, at the time this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the big right hitting promotion effect has already ended.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2), during 1R, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and an image ( arrows and text) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e3), when the 1st round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A201 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4), between rounds, the grand prize opening usually remains closed, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A102 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2R based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-41 (e5) to 10-42 (e8) based on the large prize opening designation command (A102 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-41 (e5) to FIG. 10-42 (e8) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e6), during 2R, a V probability change suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a text image of "PUSH!!" is displayed together with an image prompting the user to operate the push button 31B, overlapping the background image corresponding to the performance during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability change suggestion performance, a V An image of the text "Success!!" is displayed to notify you of a guaranteed jackpot. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V probability change suggestion performance, etc.). Sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effects during the round (V-probability change suggestion effects, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e8), when the 2nd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A202 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e9), between rounds, the big prize opening usually remains closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a message " A text image "Success!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A103 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-42 (e10) to 10-43 (e12) based on the large prize opening designation command (A103 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-42 (e10) to FIG. 10-43 (e12) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened and the V preview effect is executed. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a character image and a character image saying "Catch V in the next round!!" are displayed so as to overlap the background image according to the effect during the round. Furthermore, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e11), during the 3R, the V preview effect continues to be executed, and is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, overlapping the background image corresponding to the in-round effect, together with the character image. A text image "Catch the V in the next round!!" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right-hand hit is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V preview performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the presentation during the round (V preview presentation, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e12), when the 3rd round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A203 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. On the other hand, based on the command from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect aiming for V during the rounds from after the 3rd round to the 4th round.

As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), between rounds, the Aim for V effect is executed with the grand prize opening remaining closed, that is, with the game ball unable to enter the grand prize opening. Specifically, V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large prize ball device 075F007B), which is the target (location) that the player is made to aim at by hitting right, is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image according to the performance during the round. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a text image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the Aim for V effect, by using the image display regarding the V big winning hole, it is possible to urge the player to hit the ball to the right so that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A104 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the large prize opening designation command (A104 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-44 (e14) to FIG. 10-44 (e15) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V big prize opening is opened and the Aim for V effect is executed. As a result, the player can aim for the V-big prize opening by hitting the ball to the right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e15), during the 4R, an aim for V effect is executed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and text) of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (aim for V effect, etc.).

When a game ball enters the V big prize opening and a V prize is generated, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the V winning performance. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-44 (e16) to 10-45 (e18) based on the probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-44 (e16) to FIG. 10-45 (e18) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), when the V-winning effect is executed, a " V'' image is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and letters) promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round (V winning performance, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e17), when the 4th round ends, the V grand prize opening closes, and the CPU 103 sends a command after opening the grand prize opening (A204 command) to the performance control CPU 120. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e18), between rounds, the V big prize opening and the normal big prize opening remain closed, and a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and furthermore, an image (arrow and characters) for promoting small right-handed shots is displayed in the upper right corner.

When the period between rounds ends, the CPU 103 transmits a large prize opening designation command (A105 command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-45 (e19) to 10-46 (e21) based on the large prize opening designation command (A105 command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-45 (e19) to FIG. 10-46 (e21) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal big prize opening is opened, a background image corresponding to the performance during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e20), during 5R, an in-round effect is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and furthermore, in the upper right of the screen, an image of a small right hit promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right of the screen. (arrow and text) is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance during the round.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (e21), when the 5th round ends, the normal grand prize opening is closed, and the CPU 103 sends a command (A205 command) to the production control CPU 120 to specify after opening the grand prize opening. do. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the specified command after opening the big winning hole. Furthermore, at a predetermined timing after that, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-46 (f1) to 10-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-46 (f1) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1), when the ending effect starts, an image is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to select a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2), during the ending performance, a name image (in this example, a character image of "Yumemu RUSH!!") indicating the name of the variable state is displayed on the image display device 5 along with the character image. displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3), during the ending effect, an immersion suppression notification effect is executed. Specifically, an image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent the player from becoming addicted to the game, such as "Be careful not to get addicted to it. Pachinko is a game that can be enjoyed in moderation." Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending performance. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. In addition, at the time of consecutive winnings, a game result image showing the result of the game in the jackpot game state (for example, the number of prize balls, etc.) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending performance, but when the first hit is Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-47 (f4), a forgetting prevention image is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 to prevent forgetting to take out a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card. Further, in the upper right of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed hits is continuously displayed in the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

After the ending effect is finished, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends the effect control CPU 120 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification. A command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command) are transmitted. On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 inputs the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-48 (g1) and (g2) into a pending storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), and a symbol variation specification command. (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (g1) and (g2) in FIGS. 10-48 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g1), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit is continuously displayed at the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g2), the second special symbol stops changing and a losing symbol is displayed. At this time as well, the image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of losing symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the stoppage of the losing symbol.

After the fluctuation of the second special symbol has stopped, if there is a second pending memory number, the CPU 103 sends a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command) to the production control CPU 120. , a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result specification command (8C series command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 series command). On the other hand, based on commands from the CPU 103, the production control CPU 120 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner in accordance with the fluctuations in the second special symbol, or performs fluctuating production (for example, , reach performance, preview performance, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 stores the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 10-48 (g3) to 10-49 (g5) as a reservation storage number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), Settings are made based on the symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command). In other words, each performance performed between FIG. 10-48 (g3) to FIG. 10-49 (g5) is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-48 (g3), even while the second special symbol is changing, an image (arrow and text) promoting a small right hit continues to be displayed at the upper right of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of variation of the special symbols.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g4), in the case of jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), a group preview performance is executed as a preview performance during jackpot fluctuations. The group preview effect refers to objects such as characters appearing in stages or all at once on the screen of the image display device 5, making it difficult to see the ready-to-reach symbols, and then disappearing to make it difficult to see the reach symbols. This is an effect that makes a matching pattern (for example, 777, etc.) appear. Even if a preview effect that makes it difficult to see the symbols in such a reach mode is executed, the image of the small right hit promotion effect ( arrows and text) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of effect images" means that due to the display of effect images such as group previews, the player cannot completely see the image of the effect promoting small right-handed hits, or the player is affected by the display of effect images such as group previews. Players' visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting may be hindered or reduced, such as when they can see the image of the effect a little but cannot understand the meaning of the image (promoting right-handed hitting). This means that the player's visibility is affected in some way. On the other hand, in a situation where the above-mentioned phenomenon does not occur and the player's visibility of the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not obstructed or reduced, the image promoting small right-handed hitting is not the same as the effect image. It can be said that the results are not affected by the display.

When the variation of the special symbols stops, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the performance control CPU 120. Note that the performance control CPU 120 does not particularly set the performance based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 10-49 (g6), when a jackpot (10R variable jackpot) occurs as a result of the stoppage of fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the performance control CPU 120. Send. Note that since the right-handed hitting promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed hitting display lighting command (FD type command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fanfare performance based on the command from the CPU 103. Note that the performance control CPU 120 sets the data of each performance shown in FIGS. 10-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command). In other words, each performance performed between (h1) and (h2) in FIGS. 10-50 is not triggered by a performance control command, but progresses over time.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h1), as a fanfare performance, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Yattane!!") is displayed on the image display device 5. A sound congratulating the jackpot is outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode congratulates the jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), after the fanfare performance has started, a name image (in this example, a character image of "SPECIAL BONUS!!") indicating the name of the jackpot game state that has occurred is displayed on the image display device 5. , a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 changes so that the lighting mode corresponds to the start of the jackpot. In addition, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, since the big right-hitting promotion performance has already been executed when the special symbol 1 is won, the big right-hitting promotion performance is not executed again. For this reason, as shown in Figures 10-25 (c4) to 10-32 (c24), no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, and furthermore, , the frame lamp does not light up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

When the fanfare performance is finished, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) specifying that the grand prize opening is open to the performance control CPU 120. On the other hand, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare performance to the in-round performance based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round performance in the 1R.

As shown in FIG. 10-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and then the background image is displayed in the upper right corner. An image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner according to the performance during the round.

After that, although not shown, various performances such as V preview performance, Aim for V performance, and V winning performance are executed during the round as shown in Figures 10-40 to 10-46, and eventually, when the jackpot round ends, , the ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 10-46 and 10-47. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-48, control is again made to the variable probability state after the jackpot game state. In this series of games, in the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hitting is displayed, as well as the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020, and the fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display parts 075F055 of the unit 075F050 continues to light up. Eventually, when the variable probability state after the jackpot game state ends without a jackpot occurring and the state is controlled to the normal state, a right-hit display light off designation command is sent from the CPU 103 to the production control CPU 120, and the production control CPU 120 The CPU 120 erases the image (arrow and text) of the small right-handed promotion effect in the upper right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and also erases the right-handed hitting display part 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Each of the sections 075F055 is turned off. As a result, the player will play left-handed again in the normal state.

[Performance mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when recovering from power outage]
FIG. 10-51 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the fanfare presentation due to one special drawing win. The power outage shown in Figure 10-51 is assumed to be power outage 1 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during a fanfare performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-20. .

As shown in FIG. 10-51, an image congratulating the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a text image of "Congratulations!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-51). -24 (c1) state), a state in which a name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (in this example, a character image of "CHANCE BONUS!!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 10-24 (c2)) ), a state in which only the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-28 (c14)), and a state in which the arrow image in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is displayed together with "Right-handed hitting!" !” character image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23)), if a power outage occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. Thereafter, when the power is turned on, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A101 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A101 command), an effect image during 1R as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. Additionally, an image congratulating you on hitting the jackpot (in this example, a character image and a character image saying "Congratulations!!"), and a name image showing the name of the jackpot gaming state (in this example, "CHANCE BONUS!!") After the power is turned on, all of the images, including the arrow image in the big right-handed driving promotion performance, and the character image ``Right-handed!!'' added to the arrow image in the big right-handed game promotion performance, are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs before the big right hit promotion performance is executed or before the big right hit promotion performance is completed, the small right hit promotion performance will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards. Therefore, immediately after recovering from a power outage, it is possible to at least encourage the player to hit the ball to the right, and if the player forgets to hit the ball to the right, he or she is unable to enter the game ball into the winning hole. This makes it possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIG. 10-52 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during one round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-52 assumes a power outage 2 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20.

As shown in FIG. 10-52, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance during 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. If prize balls are obtained during subsequent rounds, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, such as adding 10 points for every 10 balls obtained. Note that the point image is not limited to one that is displayed at 0pt after recovery from a power outage, but may be made so that the point cannot be recognized by a predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 10-53 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the round after the first round of jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in Figure 10-53 is the power outage 3 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in Figure 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-53, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the performance between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the performance control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A102 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A102 command), the image display device 5 displays a performance image during 2R as shown in FIG. 10-41 (e5). Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-54 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the second round of the jackpot when the first special drawing is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-54 is assumed to be power outage 4 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20.

As shown in FIG. 10-54, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the V probability change suggestion effect during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-41 (e7)), the image After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V preview performance as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening designation command (A103 command) and jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it.

FIG. 10-55 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the second round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-55 is the power outage 5 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-20. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-55, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-42 (e9)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) promoting small right-handed shots is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command for specifying that the big winning hole is open (A103 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image during 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) after returning from the power outage, the production control The CPU 120 executes a V preview performance as shown in FIG. 10-42 (e10) based on the jackpot opening designation command (A103 command) and jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured as

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-56 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine when the pachinko game machine recovers from a power outage between rounds after the third round of the jackpot at the time of winning the first special drawing. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-56 is the power outage 6 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 3R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Suppose.

As shown in FIG. 10-56, if a power outage occurs while the image corresponding to the round after 3R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 10-43 (e13)), the image display device After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image "Restoring..." is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A104 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image during 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage. Furthermore, since the stored data regarding the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. In addition, if the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command) to the production control CPU 120 in addition to the jackpot opening specifying command (A104 command) after returning from a power outage, the production control The CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 and executes an effect aimed at V as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e14) based on the jackpot opening specifying command (A103 command) and the jackpot start specifying command (A0 series command). It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the V-winning slot in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-57 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the 4th round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-57 assumes a power outage 7 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21.

As shown in FIG. 10-57, an image corresponding to the Aim for V in 4R effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. If a power outage occurs in a state where is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, when the power is turned on, "Recovering..." will be displayed. The character image is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), a performance image during 5R as shown in FIG. 10-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during a jackpot round, the small right-handed hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the very least, immediately after the power outage returns, the player will not be able to hit right. To prevent a player from being disadvantaged, such as not being able to enter a game ball into a regular big prize opening in the next round, due to forgetting to hit the ball to the right. I can do it. Furthermore, as in the 4R, if a power outage occurs while a small right hit promotion performance is being executed along with the V target performance, or as shown in Figure 10-51 mentioned above, a small right hit promotion performance and a small right hit promotion performance may occur. In the case where a power outage occurs while a right-handed hit promotion performance is being executed, the common thing is that after returning from the power outage, the aim for V performance and the large right-handed hit promotion performance are not executed, while the small right-handed hit promotion performance is performed. is running at least. Therefore, in any situation, it is possible to at least encourage the player to play right-handed immediately after recovering from a power outage, in a manner common to all situations.

FIG. 10-58 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage between rounds after the 4th round of the jackpot at the time of winning the special figure 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-58 is the power outage 8 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. Suppose.

As shown in Figure 10-58, when a power outage occurs in a state where the image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of Figure 10-45 (e18)) between rounds after 4R After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the command to specify that the big winning hole is open (A105 command), the CPU 120 specifies that the big winning hole is open. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that the point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed as 0pt because the memory of the point in the RAM 122 is erased due to power outage.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs between rounds, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so at the very least, the player will be encouraged to hit right right immediately after the power is restored. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the ball to the right and not being able to enter the game ball into the big prize opening in the next round. can.

FIG. 10-59 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the game returns from a power outage during the final round of the jackpot when the special figure 1 is won. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-59 assumes a power outage 9 when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21.

As shown in FIG. 10-59, a state in which an image corresponding to the in-round effect during 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state in FIG. 10-46 (e20)), or a state after the end of 5R (in FIG. -46 (state e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, a character image “Restoring...” is displayed on the image display device 5 when the power is turned on.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 type command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command), the production control CPU 120 executes the jackpot end designation command (A3 type command). Based on this, an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIG. 10-46 (f1) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the final round of a jackpot, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on, so at the minimum, players will be able to It can encourage players to hit right-handed, and it can prevent them from forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 10-60 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power outage during the ending performance at the time of winning the special drawing 1. The power outage shown in FIG. 10-60 assumes a power outage 10 in which the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending performance and then the power supply is restored, as shown in FIG. 10-21. .

As shown in FIG. 10-60, in the ending performance, an image for selecting a stage in a variable probability state after the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 10-46 (f1)), a character A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probability change state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the image (the state shown in FIG. 10-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the addictive suppression notification effect, and a game result in the jackpot game state are shown. A game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state shown in FIG. 10-47 (f3)), and a forgetting prevention image for preventing players from forgetting to take out cards owned by the player is displayed on the image display device 5. If a power outage occurs in any of the displayed states (the state shown in Figure 10-47 (f4)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image "Restoring..." will be displayed when the power is turned on. is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during recovery, an image (arrow and text) for promoting small right-handed hits continues to be displayed in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown in the drawings, when the power is turned on, the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 of the special pattern LED board 075F020 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are also lit to encourage right-handed hitting.

After that, if there is a pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 sends a pending memory number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , the display result specification command (8C series command), and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 series command) are received, and when these commands are received, the pending storage number specification command (C1 series command, C2 series command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), symbol variation specification command (8D series command), display result specification command (8C series command), and variation pattern specification command (81 series command), the An image display device 5 displays an effect image corresponding to the variation of the special symbol.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory number, the production control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103. Based on the specified command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demonstration specification command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial pattern (in this example, "123" as a decorative pattern and small pattern) stopped. .

In this way, even if a power outage occurs during the ending, the small right hit promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on afterwards, so the player will at least be encouraged to hit right right after the power is restored. This prevents as much as possible the players from being disadvantaged, such as forgetting to hit the right hand and not being able to enter the second starting prize slot in a variable state after a jackpot game state. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by characteristic part 075F]
Below, technical effects obtained by various configurations of the feature portion 075F described above will be individually listed.

(1-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)), and A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-hand hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)) and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, while ending the first guidance display, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the big right hit suggestion effect is ended). (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, the third guidance display is performed while the game medium cannot enter the specific area, and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), aim for V. (a part that displays an image corresponding to the production and continues to display an image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion production),
Thereafter, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area changes from the state where the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued). As shown in 10-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the aiming V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), aim for V. (a part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is continued while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect is ended),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hitting suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process for executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of text and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guide display is ended while the second guide display is continued (for example, FIGS. 10-38 (d1), (d2) ), where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect is ended while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed shot suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the closing of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, in Figure 10-43 As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the release of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that allows entry into the specific area, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, in conjunction with the game medium entering the specific area, the third guide display is ended while the second guide display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44 (e16), (The part where the image display corresponding to the aiming effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hitting suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

(1-3) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous for the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There it is,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting suggestion effect or an aim-for-V effect by the CPU 120);
A specific area into which the gaming medium flowing down the second downstream path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B); Equipped with
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of text and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)); A second guidance display using an image display smaller than the first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1)), and an image related to the specific area. including a third guidance display using a display (for example, an image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13)),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are executed during execution of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting suggestion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting suggestion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
Thereafter, by receiving a 1R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-38). As shown in (d1) and (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed hit suggestion effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit suggestion effect is continued),
Thereafter, by receiving a command after the end of 3R (for example, a command after opening the big prize opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-43). As shown in (e13), the part that displays an image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the grand prize opening designation command (A104 command)), the second guide display and the third guide display are continued (for example, in FIG. 10-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues to display the image corresponding to the Aim for V effect and the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect),
Thereafter, by receiving a V passage command (for example, a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command)), the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-44). As shown in (e16), the part where the image display corresponding to the Aim for V effect ends while the image display corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect continues),
While the first guidance display and the second guidance display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to a large right-hand hitting suggestion effect and an image corresponding to a small right-hand hitting suggestion effect) 10-44 (e15) while the second guidance display and the third guidance display are being performed. When a power outage occurs (while displaying an image corresponding to the V target effect and an image displaying a small right hit suggestion effect), and when recovering from the power outage, the first The image display is performed again in such a manner that the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 10-51 and 10-57, "Restoring...") (The part where the text image and the image promoting small right-handed shots are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. After that, it is possible to prevent the player from appealing to the player about excessively hitting the right by making the player recognize it surely, and then continuing the performance promoting the small right-handed hit while ending the big right-handed hitting promotion performance. In addition, the Aim for V effect to make people aim for the V grand prize opening will be executed from the time when the V grand prize opening is still closed, and will continue as it is even after the V grand prize opening is opened. It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming for the big winning hole, and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning hole. In addition, by ending the Aim for V effect after a V win occurs and the V big win opening is closed, it is possible to prevent unnecessary promotional notifications from being given to the player. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, the small right-handed promotion performance is continuously executed, so players are encouraged to always play right-handed from before the V-big winning opening opens to after the V-winning occurs. can be encouraged. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right. In addition, when a power outage occurs while displaying an image corresponding to a big right hit suggestion effect and an image display corresponding to a small right hit suggestion effect and the power is restored from the power outage, it also corresponds to the Aim for V effect. If a power outage occurs while the image display and the image corresponding to the small right hit suggestion effect are being displayed and the power is restored from the power outage, the text image "Restoring..." and the small Since an image promoting right-handed playing is displayed, even if a power outage occurs, the player can be at least encouraged to continue playing right-handed in subsequent games.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. a process for executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120;
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 (c25)). image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in c1),
The guide display means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and Performing the second guidance display (for example, image display corresponding to the large right-handed hitting promotion performance and image display corresponding to the small right-handed hitting promotion performance shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26)),
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is ended while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-39 (e1) to FIG. 10-46 (e21), the jackpot is (The part where the image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is not displayed during the round, while the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is continued),
In the special state (for example, probability change state, time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state has ended, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after the jackpot as shown in FIGS. 10-48 and 10-49). part that continues to display an image corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect in a variable probability state),
The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display of the background image (for example, the switching display by fade-out and fade-in) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) to As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out),
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect) (for example, the image display due to the group preview effect as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5)). (The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare performance, a large right-handed batting promotion performance and a small right-handed batting promotion performance are executed to emphasize the promotion of right-handed batting, thereby encouraging the player to bat right-handed in subsequent games. To ensure that a player is aware of excessive hitting to the right, and during the subsequent jackpot round, to end a big right hitting promotion performance while continuing a small right hitting promotion performance, thereby not appealing to a player that he hits the right excessively. I can do it. In addition, by continuing to perform the small right-handed hit promotion performance even in the variable probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, it is possible to encourage the player to always play right. Furthermore, after a jackpot occurs, the small right hit promotion effect will not be affected by the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the jackpot round after the fanfare effect is executed, and the jackpot game state will not be affected. Since the small right-handed hit promotion performance is not affected by the image display such as the group preview performance performed in the probability change state or time-saving state after the game ends, the player can always be encouraged to play the right hit. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed hit promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means is
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
In a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. (For example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the corresponding sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R. part that does not output sound depending on the mode).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means repeats the guide light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, displays an image corresponding to a big right-handed hit promotion effect). (The part where the frame lamps are lit twice in an arching motion from the left side to the right side)
The sound output means includes:
A corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c4) to Fig. 10-32 (c24) ), when the frame lamp is turned on in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
When the last guide light emission is performed among the plurality of guide light emissions, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (c26) to 10-33 (c29)). (The part where no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance when the frame lamp is lit in the big right-handed hitting promotion performance),
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part that outputs sound in a manner according to the
The guide means is configured to control the display result of the variable display in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state). When the specific display result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp will display a large right-handed hit promotion effect) (the part that does not light up depending on the situation).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the lighted part of the frame lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, so the player is encouraged to hit right more effectively. can be encouraged. Furthermore, when the first frame lamp promotes right-handed hitting, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. When the frame lamp (second time) is used to promote right-handed hitting, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without overlapping the BGM with the sound corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., emitting guidance light to prompt the player to fire the game media toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after turning off the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, after turning off the light, (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotional effect)
The sound output means includes:
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission is output in conjunction with the guide light emission (for example, FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 10-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first big right-handed driving promotion performance, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance),
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the speaker 8L, 8R will output a big right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not output sound in a corresponding manner).

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion performance is not executed, and the sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion performance is not outputted, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized and the player can be prevented from feeling bothersome. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine) that performs a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. A gaming machine 1),
a firing means (for example, a ball-striking operation handle 30) capable of firing a game medium (for example, a game ball) into a game area according to a player's operation;
A first downstream path (for example, a path passing through the left area of the gaming area) and a second downstream path (for example, a path passing through the right area of the gaming area) through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. Among them, a guidance display means (for example, for performance control) that displays a guidance display (for example, an image display encouraging the player to play right) using an image display to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path. A process of executing a right-handed hitting promotion effect by the CPU 120);
Guide means (e.g., a guide means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L) that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path by moving the light emitting portions of the light emitting means (e.g., frame right lamp 075F009R and frame left lamp 075F009L); , a process of executing a right-hitting suggestion performance using a frame lamp by the performance control CPU 120);
Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect located at the center of the screen shown in FIG. 10-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 10-24 Image display corresponding to the small right-handed hit promotion effect located at the top right of the screen shown in (c1)),
As the first guidance display, an image display is performed that urges the player to fire the game medium toward the second downstream path in a manner that is more emphasized than the second guidance display (for example, a large right-handed hit is promoted). The presentation uses images of larger letters and shapes than the small right-hand hit promotion presentation),
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the guide display means displays a name of the advantageous state that is part of a start performance (for example, a fanfare performance) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state. Before the display (for example, display of a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, displaying the name of the jackpot gaming state as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1). Before the display of the name image is completed, an image corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is displayed), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- As shown in 33, after the display of the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state is completed, an image corresponding to the big right hit promotion performance is displayed),
The guide means is
After the light emitting means is turned off, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, after the light is once turned off, it corresponds to a big right-handed drive promotion effect) (The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display)
Thereafter, in a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state has ended (for example, a variable probability state, a time saving state), the display result of the variable display is changed to the specific display. When a result is obtained, the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of a consecutive jackpot with 2 special symbols, the frame lamp responds to the big right hit promotion effect. (The part that does not light up depending on the mode)

Specifically, after a jackpot has occurred, the player is first encouraged to hit the right hand modestly by executing a small right hit promotion effect, and then by displaying a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state. The player can be made aware that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state. Then, after making the player aware that the jackpot round has started, the player is informed that he or she will hit right in an emphasized manner using a big right hit promotion effect, thereby encouraging the player to hit right in subsequent games. It can be recognized with certainty. In addition, while the big right-handed hit promotion effect is being executed, the frame lamp once goes out, and then the lighted part of the lamp moves to the right to promote right-handed hits, making it easier to understand and more effective. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed. Further, when the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed hitting, sounds are outputted from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, so that the player is encouraged to play right-handed by the sound as well. I can do it. In addition, in the probability change state or time saving state after the jackpot game state, if a consecutive winning with 2 special symbols occurs, since we have already promoted right-handed hitting, when the first hit with 1 special symbol occurs. Since the big right-handed hitting promotion effect is not executed like this, and the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect, the right-handed hitting promotion is frequently emphasized. This can prevent players from feeling bothered. Thereby, it is possible to suitably instruct the player to hit the ball to the right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the name display of the advantageous state that is part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the big right-handed driving promotion effects shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33 has a larger character image than the name image display in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2). The characters appear one by one in stages, take a long time to execute, and are displayed in an emphasized manner. With this, it is possible to emphasize to the player that he should play right-handed.

(6) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means is
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Not outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, but the second one Regarding the subsequent right-handed driving promotion, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound corresponding to the right-handed hitting promotion effect. For example, if the frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed player promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed players. Also, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onwards. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting only includes sound data linked to the first right-handed promoting. As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(7) The guide means repeatedly emits the guide light a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guide display,
The sound output means includes:
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the first guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
Outputting a corresponding sound corresponding to the guide light emission in conjunction with the intermediate guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emission;
When the last guide light emission among the plurality of guide light emissions is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the multiple right-handed driving promotion performances using frame lamps, a sound corresponding to the right-handed batting promotion performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed batting promotion, and then In conjunction with the promotion of hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right, but regarding the final promotion to hitting to the right, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sounds corresponding to the presentation to promote hitting to the right. For example, when a frame lamp is used to promote right-handed players three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed players based on the sound data for the right-handed players. and outputs a sound in conjunction with the promotion of the third right-handed hit. In other words, the sound data for promoting right-handed hitting includes only sound data linked to the first and second right-handed promoting. Note that the sound data may include only sound data linked to one time's right-handed promotion, and the production control CPU 120 may execute two loops of the sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. . Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits, and the production control CPU 120 may execute the sound data that is linked to promoting two right-handed hits once. . As a result, the BGM during the jackpot round that is output after the big right-hitting promotion effect is not overlaid with the sound of the mode corresponding to the promotion of right-handed hitting, and the player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round. can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is constituted by a plurality of lamps, and emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after all of the plurality of lamps are turned off (for example, Fig. 10-25 (c3) As shown in , after all the lamps of the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect).

Specifically, after all the lamps in the frame lamp are turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner that corresponds to the big right hit promotion effect, so that the player is encouraged to hit right more easily and effectively. I can do it.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on data defined by a lighting data table;
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIG. 10-34) that defines the execution time of the guide light emission, and a child table (for example, the grandchild table that defines the data referred to by the light emitting means). , the child table shown in FIG. 10-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the big right hit promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and specifies the grandchild table in which lighting data is specified by referring to the child table. It is specified and turned on/blinking/off by referring to the grandchild table. Thereby, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently lit in an appropriate lighting manner.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not emit the guide light is not defined as the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, upper attacker lamp 075F009U, and board left lamp 075F009E are not used in the big right-handed promotion effect and are turned off, so a grandchild table is provided. do not have. Thereby, the capacity of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guide means emits the guide light by sequentially moving the light emitting portion of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player shoots the game medium (for example, FIG. 10-25 to FIG. 10- As shown in 33, each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-25 to 10-33, by lighting up each lamp included in the frame lamp in order from the left side to the right side of the gaming area, a big right-handed hit promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to urge the player to play right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means (for example, a part that lights up a frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp performs a big right-handed hit promotion effect while lighting up in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to play right-handed.

(13) The second guidance display is not affected by the switching display by fade-in and fade-out as the switching display of the background image performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 10-38 (d1) ~ As shown in FIG. 10-39 (d4), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image by fade-in and fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-38 (d1) to 10-39 (d4), the small right-handed hit promotion effect involves switching the background image by fade-in and fade-out when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round. It continues without being affected by the display. Thereby, even if the fanfare performance is switched to the jackpot round by switching the display of the background image, the player can be encouraged to continue hitting the ball to the right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the preview effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, in FIG. -49 (as shown in g5), the part where the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion effect is continued without being affected by the image display by the group preview effect).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-49 (g5), the small right hit promotion effect affects the display in the preview effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot advantageous state. continues without being affected. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the preview effect, the arrow images and text images in the small right-handed promotion effect will continue to be displayed without hindering their visibility. The player can be encouraged to play right-handed.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guide light is not emitted (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2) So, in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, no sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a manner that corresponds to the large right-handed promotion effect. parts that do not light up).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the mode corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect is from speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first winning. , the sound is not output, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling bothered by the promotion of right-handed play being frequently emphasized.

[Modified example of characteristic part 075F]
A modification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the above-described feature section 075F will be explained.

(About turning off the lights before the execution of the big right-handed hit promotion performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c3), after all the lamps in the frame lamp are once turned off, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the big right hit promotion effect. However, it is not limited to turning off all the lamps, and some of the lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the big right-handed driving promotion performance (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is subsequently lit in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hit promotion effect.

(About the switching display during the jackpot round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-38 (d1) to FIG. 10-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare performance to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are used. Although switching display of background images has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as a switching display during the jackpot round, a production effect such as a whiteout in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare production and the jackpot round, or a blackout in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used.

Furthermore, the switching display during the jackpot round may include displaying a BGM selection screen for selecting BGM (song), and switching to a background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen.

Furthermore, the switching display during the jackpot round may include displaying a mode selection screen for selecting a production mode, and switching to a background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the jackpot round, it is sufficient to ensure that the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance is not affected.

(Regarding the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state)
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-49 (g5), as the display of the performance image in the probability change state after the jackpot game ball state, the image display based on the group preview performance is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, to display the performance image in the variable probability state after the jackpot game ball state, you may use a whiteout effect that inserts a pure white screen during the reach effect, or a blackout effect that inserts a pure black screen. You may use the effect of a pseudo-continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or you can make the visibility of the decorative pattern difficult by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may also use a production effect that makes you feel In any case, even if a special performance display is performed in a probability change state after a jackpot game ball state, it is sufficient to prevent the image display corresponding to the small right hit promotion performance from being affected.

(About the production aiming for V)
In this embodiment, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V grand prize opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is exemplified as the specific area, and as an effect of aiming for V, As shown in FIG. 10-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V-large prize opening was displayed. However, the image display in the Aim for V effect, which is the third guide display using image display related to a specific area, is not limited to this, and the image display in the Aim for V effect does not only point to the V grand prize opening itself, but also refers to the vicinity of the V grand prize opening. Alternatively, it may refer to a route leading to the V-sized winning opening, for example, a lid portion that opens and closes the V-sized winning opening located upstream of the V-sized winning opening.

(About the promotion of big right-handed hits)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-25 (c4) to FIG. 10-31 (c23), an arrow graphic image appears first, and then a text image of "Right hit!!" appears. However, it is not limited to this. For example, a text image of "Right hit!!" may appear first, and then a graphic image of an arrow may appear. In addition, an image display for promoting a large right-handed hit, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a text image, whereas an image display for promoting a small right-handed hit, which is an example of the second guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image. However, it may be composed of only arrow images or only character images.

(About advantageous conditions)
In this embodiment, the periods shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) to FIG. 10-47 (f4) (from t3 in FIG. 10-20 to t16 in FIG. ), but the example is not limited to this. For example, the period of "advantageous state" is the period excluding the fanfare performance period, that is, the period shown in Figure 10-39 (d3) to Figure 10-47 (f4) (from t4 in Figure 10-20 to Figure 10-21 (up to t16). Further, the fanfare performance and the big right hit promotion performance may be performed during a period in which a symbol in which a jackpot occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About the promotion of right-handed hitting in case of first hit)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a jackpot with one special figure, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the frame lamp is outputted in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed hitting promotion effect. However, this is not the only example. For example, depending on the type of jackpot in one special drawing, the aspects of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be made different. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the jackpot for one special drawing is a variable jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the big right-handed hit promotion performance. The sound may be output in different ways. In addition, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp will not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R will not emit sound in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect. You may also choose not to output it.

(About the right-handed promotion promotion in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special drawings)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-50 (h2), in the case of consecutive winnings with 2 special symbols, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in a manner according to the big right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp may not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, while the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a big right-handed hit, the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a manner that corresponds to the presentation that promotes a large right-handed hit.

Further, depending on the type of consecutive winnings in the special figure 2 winnings, the aspect of the big right-hitting promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be changed. For example, if the jackpot for one special drawing is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed driving promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make sounds in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed hit promotion effect. is not output, and if the consecutive winnings on 2 special drawings are a guaranteed strange jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the big right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. In addition, if the consecutive winning of the special figure 2 is a normal jackpot, the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp does not light up in a manner that corresponds to the big right-handed promotion effect from speakers 8L and 8R. You may also choose not to output any sound. If the consecutive winnings on special drawings 2 are a guaranteed strange jackpot, unlike the first winning on special drawings 1, the frame lamp will appear in a special manner according to the big right-handed promotion effect (for example, gold, seven colors, etc.) ) may be turned on, or the speakers 8L and 8R may output sound in a special manner in accordance with the effect of promoting a big right-handed hit. Also, on the screen of the image display device 5, a big right-hitting promotion effect may be performed in a special manner (for example, a special character appears) that is different from the first hit for one special figure. .

(About the third information display)
In the present embodiment, as the third guide display using the image display regarding the specific area, an image pointing to the V big prize opening during the jackpot round in the variable probability jackpot is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image may be displayed that prompts the player to fire the game ball at the second starting prize opening in the variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, or a variable winning ball may be displayed as the third guidance display. Displaying an image that prompts the player to shoot a game ball at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) may be applied. For example, after the ending performance is finished, the production control CPU 120 receives from the CPU 103 a pending memory number specification command (C2 series command), a background specification command (95 series command), a symbol variation specification command (8D series command), a display result command, etc. Based on the reception of the specified command (8C series command) and the variable pattern specification command (81 series command), an arrow image pointing to the second starting winning hole and the variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) is displayed along with the message "Aim!" ” may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the figures and character images in the small right-handed driving promotion effect may continue to be displayed.

(About time-saving state control by displaying losing symbols)
In each of the above-mentioned features and modifications, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) is always via the jackpot state or small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

In addition, as the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be part of the losing symbols or may be part of the small winning symbols.

In addition, when performing lottery processing related to the derivation display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using special random numbers for the time-saving symbol lottery, or lottery random numbers for losing symbols or jackpot symbols may be used for these lottery processing. The lottery may be performed using other random numbers for performing a lottery, such as a lottery random number for a small winning symbol, a random number for determining a jackpot lottery, or a lottery random number for a falling lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be of a plurality of types, and may be used in combination with a combination of symbols displayed as other symbols such as small winning symbols and losing symbols. In this case, whether or not to shift to the time saving state may be determined based on the small winning symbols used together. However, when the time saving symbol is won, there is no further lottery to determine whether or not there will be a transition to the time saving state, nor to determine the number of time saving times.

In addition, when drawing a time-saving symbol, if the setting value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the setting value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol at all setting values. are the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, regarding the timing of obtaining random numbers when drawing time-saving symbols, whether using a special random number or another random number, the starting opening (first starting winning opening), It is sufficient to win at the time of winning in the second starting prize opening).

In addition, for winnings when drawing time-saving symbols, if special random numbers (time-saving random numbers) are used, the winning value is the lottery result using the dedicated random numbers (time-saving random numbers), and the small winning symbol is used in the time-saving symbol lottery. When using random numbers, the random number of a specific small winning symbol can be used as the winning value, and when the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the time saving symbol lottery, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. For example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable prize winning ball device 7, and the passing of the game ball through the time-saving area may be regarded as a winning of the time-saving symbol.

In addition, when drawing time-saving symbols using structures, when the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable number of times the time-saving state is displayed (time-saving number) is set so that it does not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed. Make it.

In addition, regarding winning when drawing a time-saving symbol, if a losing symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value, and if a jackpot symbol random number is used in the time-saving symbol drawing, a specific losing symbol random number is used as the winning value. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, if these random numbers are used as winning values, performance other than the jackpot probability will vary depending on the settings, so this is only possible if the set values cannot be changed.

Moreover, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, no matter which random number the random number used for the lottery is, the time-saving symbol lottery is not executed in the time-saving state (high base) or in the high probability state, but only in the low probability low base state. . However, even if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed in a time-saving state, the difference between resetting the time-saving number and not drawing a lottery may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, the number of time saving times when the time saving symbols are derived and displayed can be a plurality of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and each gaming state. Further, the time saving granting conditions can be made different for each time saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving symbols differs depending on the time-saving symbol, the lottery for distributing the time-saving symbol can be changed between the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

Further, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-savings awarded may be different depending on the gaming state at that time. However, it is required that it be predetermined for the gaming state.

In addition, a lottery result of "time saving number of times 0" can be included as a lottery result of a time saving symbol in a low probability low base state.

Alternatively, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end symbol (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-savings may be set as the number of times after the time-saving start until the time-saving end symbol is derived and displayed, or until a jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time reductions may not be set, but may be unlimited in principle.

Further, the number of times of time saving and the granting conditions may be different between the time saving state controlled by the time saving symbol and the time saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where a small winning symbol random number is used for the lottery of time saving symbols, and when the small winning is won and the time saving state is to be entered, the end of the small winning operation is the timing at which the time saving state is controlled.

Further, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small winning state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability low base state for a predetermined variable display number of times after hitting a jackpot (so-called fixed number fixed variable display machine (ST machine)), the high probability low base state is controlled when the gaming hall opens. After the high probability low base state is finished after variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times, the time saving state may be controlled.

In addition, when a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time-saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time saving symbol may be set to be a different time from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to characteristic part 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time-saving state, the game state must go through the jackpot gaming state, so in order to encourage the player to play right in the time-saving state. The big right hit promotion performance and the small right hit promotion performance could be performed during the fanfare performance performed when a jackpot occurs. However, if a losing symbol as described above is used as a time-saving symbol, the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. It is necessary to secure time for executing the large right-handed hit promotion performance and the small right-handed hit promotion performance from the time the symbol is displayed until the time-saving state is controlled. Therefore, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be performed using the method described below.

For example, if the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of losing symbols that are not time-saving symbols stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the variation of losing symbols that are time-saving symbols stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. During this time, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of the time-saving state control. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C series command), the CPU 103 uses, as a loss specification command, a display result specification command that indicates a normal loss variation to which no time saving is given, as well as a loss variation for time saving to which a time saving is given. It is sufficient to prepare a display result designation command indicating , and send the production control command to the production control CPU 120 by using both commands depending on whether or not it is a losing variation of the time saving symbol. Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a normal loss variation, and sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds if it receives a display result designation command indicating a time-saving loss variation. may be set to 30 seconds.

The production control CPU 120 displays a name image indicating the name of the time-saving state (for example, "Time-saving RUSH") on the image display device 5 during the 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and also displays the time-saving state control from the speakers 8L and 8R. A sound is output in a corresponding manner, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a manner corresponding to the time saving state control. A part of such a time-saving fanfare performance can be made to correspond to a part of a fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c2).

As in the example shown in Figure 10-24 (c1), even before the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") created by this time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, an image congratulating the time-saving state (for example, "O ``Congratulations!!'' (character image) is displayed on the image display device 5, a sound congratulating the time-saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a light is turned on to congratulate the time-saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed to match the game effect lamp 9. In addition, as a small right-handed hitting promotion performance, a small right-handed hitting promotion performance is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and text (letters "right-handed hitting") is displayed in a small size at the upper right of the image display device 5, A sound that encourages right-handed hitting may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or the lighting mode of right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and right-handed hitting display section 075F055 may be changed to a mode (lighting) that encourages right-handed hitting. Note that the image in the small right-handed driving promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting of the right-handed hitting display section 075F030 and the right-handed hitting display section 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both encourage the player to play right-handed over the same period of time.

After that, similar to the example shown in Figure 10-24 (c2), the small right hit promotion performance is continued while the name image ("Time-saving RUSH") is displayed due to the time-saving fanfare performance, and then, after that, as shown in Figure 10-24 After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), the big right hit is promoted during the time-saving fanfare performance as in the examples shown in FIGS. 10-25 (c4) to 10-38 (c26). You may also perform a performance. During this time, the small right hit promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed hit promotion performance, the gaming state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed hit promotion performance may be continued, similarly to the examples shown in FIGS. 10-48 to 10-50.

In this way, even if the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time that is longer than the symbol confirmation time for a losing symbol that is not a time-saving symbol, it is possible to make a big difference in the symbol confirmation time. It is possible to perform a hitting promotion performance and a small right hitting promotion performance.

In addition, in the case where the time-saving state is controlled due to a losing symbol, it is not limited to the one that uses the symbol confirmation time to execute the large right-handed promotion performance or the small right-handed promotion production as described above, but also the loss pattern that gives time savings. If there is a pending memory corresponding to a loss for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the symbols have been determined, in the next game (variation), a time-saving fanfare performance is executed, as well as a large right hit promotion performance and a small right strike promotion performance. A hitting promotion performance may also be performed. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) after a game in which a losing pattern has been confirmed is a losing fluctuation, a time-saving fanfare performance is performed instead of executing a performance that makes you expect a hit, such as a reach performance or a preview performance. At the same time as this, a large right-handed hit promotion performance or a small right-handed hit promotion performance may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbols have been determined is a jackpot, then the fanfare performance as shown in FIG. 10-24 (c1) is executed, so the time-saving fanfare performance is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no pending memory for playing the next game (variation) after the game in which the losing symbol with time saving is confirmed, the time saving fanfare performance is executed with the symbol not changing, and the big right hit promotion performance and the small A right-handed hitting promotion effect may be performed. However, in this case, in order to prevent the customer waiting demonstration performance from being executed and hindering the time-saving fanfare performance, the CPU 103 does not send the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) to the performance control CPU 120. . Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demonstration designation command (9F series command) is received from the CPU 103, the performance control CPU 120 may execute the time-saving fanfare performance without executing the customer waiting demonstration performance.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each configuration related to a characteristic part may be combined with a part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic parts as appropriate. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with some or all of the configurations of other features, as appropriate.

The embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and provides an advantageous advantage when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
a firing means capable of firing a game medium into a game area according to a player's operation;
A guidance display that uses an image display to prompt the player to launch the gaming medium toward the second downstream path of the first downstream path and the second downstream path through which the gaming medium can flow down in the gaming area. and a guide display means for
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The guide display means includes:
During a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, before the display of the name of the advantageous state is completed, which is part of the start effect to notify the start of control of the advantageous state, performing a second guidance display, and after completing the display of the name of the advantageous state, performing the first guidance display and continuing the second guidance display;
Continuing the second guidance display while ending the first guidance display in a period after the predetermined period;
Continuing the second guidance display in the special state after the control of the advantageous state has ended;
moreover,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update the numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 12-13, the state control means includes a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the state control means makes the numerical information updated by the updating means a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. By this, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, As shown, the updating means (the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) is used when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed. An example of this is a gaming machine that updates numerical information depending on the situation (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the gaming control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIGS. 12-13).
According to this feature, it is possible to suitably execute an instruction urging the player to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction. Furthermore, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be relieved and increasing his motivation to play.

In other words, during a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the instruction to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction is emphasized on the first guide display and the second guide display, and after that, the first guide display is By instructing to shoot the game ball in a predetermined direction by taking over the second guidance display without taking over, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience by not emphasizing the instruction too much, and also to display the second guidance display first. and modestly instruct the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction, then have the player recognize the name of the advantageous state, and after having the player recognize it, use the first guidance display to firmly instruct the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction. In addition, since the numerical information is updated depending on whether the first identification information is displayed variably or when the second identification information is variably displayed, for example, the first identification information may be variably displayed. Compared to a case where the numerical information is updated only when either one of the variable displays of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information will reach the special number of times more easily and the player will be more likely to be relieved, so the player will be more motivated to play. can be increased. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, can easily give instructions on the direction in which the game ball should be fired in an advantageous state to the player, thereby increasing the player's desire to play.

Further, the display mode of the guidance display may be changed depending on the value of the numerical information updated by the updating means. For example, by displaying a corresponding guide when numerical information reaches a specific number of times, it becomes possible to notify the player of the number of times in an easy-to-understand manner.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest, a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information are executed, and a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous when the situation occurs, and a state control means ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173, as shown in FIG. 12-19, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS537. ), and an updating means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display (for example, , as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71), a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIG. 12- As shown in FIG. 49, a part for executing step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120) and a special notification performance that notifies that the control of the special state will be started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, in FIG. -52 The background image changes as shown in (C1) and (C2). As shown in Figure 12-53 (B), there is a blackout at the start of the change. As shown in Figure 12-54 (C), the change ends. The system further includes a special notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638), which can execute a special notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638). In the period before the special condition is satisfied, the rate at which the predetermined suggestive performance is executed is common (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-44, the portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 12-50) Examples include gaming machines. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S909). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), as well as backup flag states and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, for example, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S908) is executed.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S907). In line with this, a performance control command that specifies the backed-up gaming state before the power outage, or a performance control command that specifies the display result of the special game that is currently being executed if the special game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated at a predetermined time interval (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

Next, a gaming machine according to Example 1 in the feature section 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-47.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 108IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, a right-handed hitting notification LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, fourth symbol displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among these, the fourth symbol display device 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display device that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display device 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display device that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display devices 100IW21a and 21b are each composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the fluctuating display of the fourth symbol is executed by repeating alternately lighting and extinguishing the two LEDs. Ru.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 108IW, instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A gate 100IW41 is provided. In this feature section 108IW, a common figure game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this feature section 108IW, in the variable probability state or time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol increases, so it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the present feature section 108IW, in the normal state, it is more advantageous to perform a firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Jackpot probability, time saving probability)
FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 12-2 shows the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, FIG. 12-3 shows the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, the setting value can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to execute setting confirmation processing and setting change processing to check current setting values and change setting values. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six steps from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 stages or more, for example.

As shown in Figures 12-2 (A) and 12-3 (A), both when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the non-probability variable state (low In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "242/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (approximately 1/270) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (B) and 12-3 (B), both when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variable state ( In the high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" (approximately 1/32), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2420/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (about 1/27) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the variable probability state compared to the non-probable variable state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-2, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not) (regardless of whether the state is in a variable state or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400). In addition, as shown in Figure 12-3, when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not) (regardless of whether the state is non-deterministic or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time saving deviation is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in Figures 12-2 and 12-3, even if the jackpot probability is varied depending on the setting value and the probability of losing time is constant as described above, the probability of winning without time saving is fixed. By varying the probabilities between set values "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be made consistent.

In addition, it may be further configured to be controllable to a small winning gaming state. If the configuration is such that the small win can also be determined, for example, the configuration may be such that the small win probability is constant regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

In addition, in the case where the small win can also be determined, the structure may be such that there is a small win with time saving that controls the time saving state using the small win as an opportunity.

Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3 are just examples, and various ways can be considered for setting the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is approximately 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol is approximately 1/400. In the case where the display is executed, the probability of time saving failure is approximately 1/200, but on the contrary, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving failure probability is approximately 1/200, When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving probability may be configured to be approximately 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 12-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 12-4(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state for 15 rounds and shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is maintained until the 100-time variation display is completed or the next jackpot occurs.

A "variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the state changes to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the 100 variable displays are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

"Suddenly variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the state changes to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the 100 variable displays are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot", in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number of games (10 in this example) are played. The grand prize opening is controlled to be open until a ball wins (therefore, the long opening of the grand prize opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "suddenly variable jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (therefore, the jackpot is kept open for a short period of time). (opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "suddenly variable probability jackpot", it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to enter the big winning hole, and it can be made to appear as if the state has suddenly shifted to a variable probability state.

As shown in Figure 12-4 (A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and results in a jackpot, it is determined that there is a 40% probability of a "normal jackpot"; A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%. In addition, as shown in Figure 12-4 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, it is determined that it is a "normal jackpot" with a probability of 40%, and the 55 A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 5%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a 5% probability.

(Time saving type determination table)
FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 12-5(A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 12-5(B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 12-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in Figure 12-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in FIGS. 12-5(A) and (B), in this example, when the first special symbol fluctuates and the time is shortened, and when the second special symbol fluctuates and the time shortens. In any case, there is a probability of 1/3 that it is determined to be a "time saving error A", a 1/3 probability that it is determined to be a "time saving error B", and a 1/3 probability that it is a "time saving error C". It is determined that

Note that the example shown in FIG. 12-5 is just one example, and various ways of determining the time saving type can be considered. For example, if it is determined that the first special symbol is a change in time saving, the probability of determining ``time saving C'' is increased, but if it is determined that the second special symbol is a change in time saving, it is determined that the time saving is incorrect. The determination rate of the time saving type may be made different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, such as by increasing the probability of determining ``missing A''.

Further, for example, if the configuration is configured such that the time reduction can be determined even during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction, it may be configured so that the time reduction number counter etc. is not uniformly overwritten even if the time reduction is exceeded, or the time reduction failure symbol Depending on the type, the time saving counter etc. may be overwritten or not overwritten in some cases.

FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving types. As shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, in the normal state, when "time saving difference A" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 100 time reduction times, and when "work time reduction difference B" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 50 time reduction times. The time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 times, and in the case of "time saving failure C", the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 time saving times. In addition, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving loss A", the time saving state is controlled until the next jackpot, and when it becomes "time saving loss B", it is controlled to the time saving state with 200 time saving times, and "time saving loss C'', the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 100 time saving times. In addition, in the normal state and the time saving state, in the case of saving time saving, the time saving state is controlled to the time saving state of 800 time saving times.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off in a variable probability state. Furthermore, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is canceled even in the time saving state due to the relief time saving. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, after the time reduction is controlled to a time reduction state of 800 time reductions due to the relief time reduction, if a jackpot does not occur even after 800 fluctuation displays are completed, the relief time reduction is resumed. Accordingly, the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled to the number of time saving times of 800 times. Therefore, the number of time reductions due to relief time reduction is essentially until the next jackpot occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction attainment rate for each set value will be explained. The relief time reduction attainment rate is the rate at which the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by performing fluctuations n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot gaming state, the relief time saving attainment rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K=Relief time saving attainment rate, P=Denominator of jackpot probability ML, n=Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is approximately 1/319, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is approximately 1/319. Since it is about 1/310, the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 7.5%, and if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 6.9%, If the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 6.3%, and if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.7%, and if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time shortening attainment rate. Thereby, even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value, it is possible to rescue the player.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-6. For example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the control may be configured such that the number of time saving times is the same (100) in the normal state and in the time saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, if it is in the normal state, the number of time savings is controlled to be 100 times, and if it is in the time saving state, it is controlled to be 0 times (i.e. It may also be configured such that the current state falls from the time saving state to the normal state. There are various possible ways to control the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed in this way.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation pattern tables in the feature section 108IW. Of these, FIG. 12-7(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for jackpot. Further, FIG. 12-7(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state. Further, FIG. 12-7(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 12-7(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the time-saving state time deviation controlled via the time-saving deviation.

Further, FIG. 12-8(E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for failures in the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving method. Further, FIGS. 12-8(F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within the last 10 variations that shorten the relief time. Among these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8(F) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less. Further, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8(G) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more.

Further, FIG. 12-8 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for failure in a variable probability state. However, in this example, even in the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending memories is not 1 or more (if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table B.

Further, FIG. 12-8(I) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table I for the deviation of the variation display, which shortens the relief time. Further, FIG. 12-8 (J) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table J for a jackpot with a fluctuation display that shortens the rescue time.

As shown in FIG. 12-7(A), in this example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns include variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PB2 -3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7(B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation patterns PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), The pattern is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), in this example, when there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the variation pattern is set to the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation), The variation pattern PA2-3 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation) is used as the variation pattern. , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figures 12-7(C), 12-7(D), and 12-8(E), in this example, in the time shortening state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern Pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) and variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) are determined at a high rate, and the average variation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving error, the selection probability of variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80% compared to when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via relief time saving, the selection rate of variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) is as high as 99%, compared to the time saving state controlled via time saving or jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (Extremely shortened variation) increases the rate at which variable display is executed, and the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-7(C), 12-7(D), and 12-8(E), in this example, compared to The selection probability is high at 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. Also, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving or jackpot, the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β ), and there is no case where a super reach is executed. In other words, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time reduction, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time reduction loss or jackpot, the super reach is not executed at the time of loss, and the average fluctuation time is shortened. There is. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is determined that the super reach has failed. This prevents the user from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, since the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, in this example, in the time saving state controlled via the rescue time saving, super reach is not executed at the time of failure, but it may be configured so that it is executed. For example, in a time saving state controlled via a relief time saving, super reach may be executed at a lower rate than in a time saving state controlled via a time saving loss or a jackpot. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is determined that the super reach has failed. Since the ratio of such events is lowered, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-8 (F), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the rescue time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less, For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting expensive. In addition, as shown in Figure 12-8 (G), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting expensive.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-8 (F) and (G), if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 There is no case where (super reach β) is determined, and there is no case where super reach is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a variable display of the super reach is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened, but a jackpot does not occur. Incidentally, even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, the ratio is lower than the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time (that is, the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in FIG. 12-7(C)). The variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined at the time of a miss.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation in the variable probability state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation), and variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation). ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 12-8 (H), in this example, in the variable probability state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further reduced than in the short time state. is shorter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (I), in this example, if the fluctuation display shortens the rescue time and the result is a failure, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (missing the rush) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Ru. In other words, the variation pattern PA3-1 (missing entry) is a variation pattern dedicated to saving time saving, which is not used for a variation display that does not shorten rescue time, but is used only for a variation display (missing) that shortens rescue time. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (missing entry), as will be described later, a time-saving entry effect (for example, 12-38 (G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the game is controlled to be in a time-saving state, and it is also possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-8 (J), in this example, if the variation display shortens the relief time and the jackpot is missed, the variation pattern PA3-2 (pretend jackpot) is determined as the variation pattern. be done. That is, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rushing fake jackpot) is a variation pattern dedicated to saving time that is not used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time, but is used only for a variation display that shortens the rescue time (jackpot). In this example, when the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (pretend jackpot) is determined, as will be described later, a time-saving entry effect (for example, Fig. 12 -38 (G), (H)) and the same type of performance (for example, see Figure 12-41 (G')), there is a performance that notifies you of a jackpot (for example, Figure 12-41 (G')). (H')) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, he is informed that he will win the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his interest.

Note that the method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 is an example, and various methods are possible. For example, if there is a time saving error during the time saving state and the time saving state is controlled again, it is the same as the fluctuation pattern table C for the time saving state time controlled via jackpot shown in Figure 12-7 (C). The variation pattern may be determined using a table.

In addition, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next jackpot (in this example, when the time saving state becomes A during the time saving state) in the case where the time saving is missed, the jackpot shown in Figure 12-7 (C) can be achieved. The variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for the time-saving state controlled by .

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 12-8 (E), during the time saving state via relief time saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 of extremely shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the variation display Because the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable preview performances and advance preview performances. For example, when in a time saving state via relief time saving, an effect image may be displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, a lamp or LED may be turned on, a predetermined effect sound, or a normal effect may be displayed. Performances such as outputting different fluctuating stop sounds are performed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a variation pattern table E is provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, but the variation pattern table E is not provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, and for example, when The variation pattern may be determined using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7(C)) during the time saving state.

Additionally, in this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case is shown in which the changeover pattern tables are switched to fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see Figures 12-8 (F) and (G)). , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time becomes short becomes smaller, or the number of breaks such as 100 or 200 remaining variations may be configured. It may be configured such that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested by switching the fluctuation pattern table only in this case.

Furthermore, in this example, the configuration is such that different fluctuation pattern tables are used (that is, the average fluctuation times are different) for the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via losing time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in both cases (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same), or the time saving state via relief time saving is better than the time saving state via jackpot or loss time saving. Alternatively, the average fluctuation time may be made longer.

(Production control command)
FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, the command 80XX(H) is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. (variable pattern command). Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving any of the commands 80XX(H), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (missing specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a failure (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 specification command) (time saving deviation A specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 specification command) (time saving deviation B specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation B. be. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command) (time saving deviation C specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation C. be.

Command 9004 (H) is a performance control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variable pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is a performance control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a variable probability jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a variable probability jackpot. .

Command 95XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, command 9501 (H) is sent as the 1 designation command for the number of relief time reductions, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, Command 957E(H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction count 1 designation command. In this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 or more, the maximum value 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and it is uniformly issued as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Command 957F(H) is transmitted.

Command 96XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100, command 9601 (H) is sent as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 800, Command 9608 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction count 1 designation command.

Command 97XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of restoration and is transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened when the power is restored is 100 or less, command 9701 (H) is sent as a command to specify the number of times that the rescue time is shortened at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, a command 9708 (H) is sent as a command for specifying the number of times to save time during recovery.

In addition, in this example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be transmitted in units of 126 times, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 127 times or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. Although the example is shown in which the information is sent to the Internet, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a combination of two commands may be transmitted so that even if the remaining number of commands is 127 or more, the commands can be transmitted in a specific manner.

Command A000(H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation C specified command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command A100 (H) is a performance control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start specification command: fanfare specification command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (jackpot end specification command: ending specification command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game.

Command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is decreased by one.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a performance control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is over. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to be in a time saving state during rescue time saving. Command E004 (H) is a performance control command (probability variable state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a probability variable state.

Command E100 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification start designation command) that specifies to start right-handed hitting notification. Command E101 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification end designation command) that specifies ending the right-handed hitting notification.

Command F000(H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) that specifies to start displaying a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, for example, at the end of the symbol confirmation period and at the end of the jackpot game, when no pending memory is stored (that is, when the total number of pending memories is 0). Further, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (it is transmitted when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). Also, for example, when transitioning to a setting change mode that executes setting change processing or a setting confirmation mode that executes setting confirmation processing, a setting value specification command is sent after each mode ends, and then a customer waiting demo specification Command is sent. In addition, when the recovery process or setting confirmation process is executed, the customer A waiting demo specification command is sent. As described later, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command, if 10 seconds elapse without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winning, the rescue time saving function is activated. A telop display indicating that the device is installed is started (in this example, whether or not to display a telop is determined by lottery). Furthermore, when three minutes have passed without receiving any other commands after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration movie is played back.

Command F1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value designation command) that designates the set value that has been set. Note that "XX" is set to a value corresponding to the set value.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 12-9 and FIG. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 12-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing in the feature section 108IW. In this example, the processing in steps S1 to S7, the processing in steps S8 to S9, and the processing in steps S10 to S12 are similar to those shown in FIG. 11.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing recovery from power outage is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, Control is performed to set a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and send a recovery rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9701 (H) as a recovery time rescue time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the current value of the rescue time saving number counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9708 (H) as a recovery time saving time saving number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed, a command to specify the number of times the recovery time is shortened is sent, and the remaining recovery time up to the current rescue time is sent. The number of changes will be notified. Further, by executing the variable display based on the suspended memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the suspended memory stored before the power outage), it is possible to shorten the rescue time. With this configuration, in a situation where a pending memory corresponding to a variable display that shortens the rescue time is stored before a power outage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player when a power outage occurs.

Note that although this example shows a case where a recovery time reduction number specifying command is transmitted separately from the recovery command at the time of power outage recovery, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened may be set in the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, and then transmitted.

Further, when the production control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, "800" is set in the rescue time reduction counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if neither a jackpot nor a time saving error occurs even after 800 fluctuation displays are executed, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state is entered. will be controlled by. In this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the effect control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" and initialized. First, the configuration may be such that the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. For example, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the time saving flags A to C indicating the time saving state, the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state, and the pending memory are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the previous day's relief time reduction counter, so the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced, and the configuration is such that it is not disadvantageous to the player. be able to. Further, it is possible to prevent the rescue time reduction number counter from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of rescue for the player.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, the configuration is such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the rescue time saving counter may be initialized.

(Special design normal processing)
FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 100 IWS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol). Data indicating "second" is set in (step 100IWS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this feature section 108IW, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the aspect shown in this example is not limited, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 100 IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figures 12-2 and 12-3) with a random number for hit determination, and executes processing to determine that it is a jackpot if they match. It is a program. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the probability variable state is not set (if it is a low probability state), the CPU 103 determines the low probability jackpot determination value (Figure 12-2 (A) and Figure 12-3 (See (A)) to determine the jackpot. Furthermore, if the probability change flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot judgment value for high probability (see Fig. 12-2 (B) and Fig. 12-3 (B)). Make a jackpot determination. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, sudden probability variable jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100 IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a jackpot (N in step 100 IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is 0 or not. (Step 100IWS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 100IWS67), and checks whether the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 100 IWS69).

Note that this example shows a case where steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed to subtract the time reduction counter before the process of counting the number of fluctuations until relief time reduction after step 100IWS70, but such a processing mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, the process of subtracting the time saving number counter may be performed after the process of counting the number of fluctuations up to the time saving time reduction after step 100IWS70 is executed. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that results in a relief time saving, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time saving number counter to "800" (see step 100 IWS172), the value of the time saving number counter will increase by 1. Since the value is subtracted, in the variable display that shortens the relief time, the value of the time saving number counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the time reduction counter may be set to "901" which is one more than before.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100 IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process moves to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS71). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time reduction state, or a variable probability state. . In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time saving number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (N at step 100 IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data and issues the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9501 (H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 957E(H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100 IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is to be controlled at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 100 IWS75). . Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data and commands 957F as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800). It is confirmed whether or not (step 100IWS77). Note that whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and performs production control of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control is performed to transmit the data to the CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9601 (H) as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS79.

In addition, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) side counts the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction, and sends the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and execute a stirring effect, a countdown effect, or an effect effect, which will be described later.

For example, as described later, the rescue time reduction count counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the rescue time reduction occurs, and in a configuration where relief time reduction can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction is The configuration is configured so that the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 1 or the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is sent only when the time reduction occurs, and the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 1 or the number 2 of rescue time reductions is sent when the rescue time is shortened from the second time onwards. It may be configured not to do so.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving mode is set (step 100 IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is via the relief time saving mode), the process moves to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS79 is executed and the time saving state is in the state of time saving via relief time saving, the process of determining whether the time saving is missed after step 100IWS81 is not performed, and the time saving is determined to be the case without saving. It was decided that

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the time saving state is not uniformly determined as a time saving failure not only during the time saving state via the rescue time saving, but also during the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. In other words, not only when the time saving flag C is set, but also when the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B are set, the process for determining whether the time saving is not achieved after step 100IWS81 is not performed, and the time saving is not performed as it is. You may decide to set it as an outlier.

Conversely, even in the time saving state via relief time saving, the process from step 100IWS81 onward may be executed to determine the time saving deviation. Further, it may be configured such that both a relief time reduction and a time reduction deviation may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured to control to a time saving state with priority given to saving time, or it may be configured to control to a time saving state giving priority to a time saving error.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if the time saving state is not via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is present), the process moves to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS80 is executed, if the state is in a variable probability state, it is determined that the time saving is not possible without performing the process of determining whether the time saving is not possible after step 100IWS81. Ru.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number for determining whether or not to save time, using a decision table for determining whether or not to reduce time. is carried out, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the time (step 100 IWS81). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the time-saving failure determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving failure occurs with a probability of approximately 1/400. (See Figure 12-2). In addition, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving error determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving error occurs with a probability of about 1/200 ( (See Figure 12-3).

If it is determined that the time reduction is not achieved (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 selects the type (time reduction A, time reduction B, time saving error C) is determined as the type of time saving error (step 100 IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first suspension storage buffer or the second suspension storage buffer in advance, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

In addition, in step 100IWS83, time saving type determination is performed using a type determination random number common to the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65. Furthermore, when configured to determine both the small hit and the small hit type, a common random number for type determination is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the jackpot type determination and time saving type determination. The configuration may be such that the determination process is performed based on the determination process.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination results of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make it a normal jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided to suddenly make a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be a time saving loss A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2". If it is determined that the time saving difference is B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4", and if it is decided that the time saving difference is C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "6". If it is decided to be a miss (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbols in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 12-14 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time is shortened and the fluctuation display is a jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the table shown in FIG. 12-8 (J) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) is selected (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 12-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702). .

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction count counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time reduction number of times counter is 0 (in other words, it is a fluctuation display that results in relief time reduction and is off), the CPU 103 uses FIG. 12-8 (I) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) is selected (step 100IWS1702B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 3 or less. Check whether it is. Note that the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter or the second pending storage number counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending memory number counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100 IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table F is selected (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the total pending memory number counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table G of is selected (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 creates a fluctuation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) as a table for determining the variation pattern. H is selected (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 12-7(C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1712 is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via the relief time-saving method, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8(E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table E for the deviation during the time saving state controlled via the IWS is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is also not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the variation pattern table stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 is to be used (step 100IWS1716). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Note that after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 12-15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sends the result of the decision as to whether or not to make a jackpot, the result of the decision of the jackpot type, and the time saving type, if it has not yet been sent. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 100IWS1122). 100IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when a time saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right hit LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 determines the symbol confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol determination B designation command or a second symbol determination B designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If it is not decided to cancel the time saving (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened by executing the process of step 100IWS1133, lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If the relief time shortening determination flag is not set (N in step 100 IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets "0.5" to the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "second" is set (step 100IWS1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). . In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIGS. 12-16 and 12-17 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 100IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not yet ended), the special symbol stop processing ends. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 100IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the probability change flag, time saving flag A, time saving flag B, time saving flag C, and for counting the number of executions of the fluctuation display during the probability change state. The time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is reset (step 100 IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when a jackpot is triggered, "800" is set in the rescue time reduction counter, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the jackpot game ends, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction error occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, this example shows a case where, when a jackpot is achieved by executing the process of step 100IWS135, the rescue time shortening counter is initialized by setting "800" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the relief time reduction counter may be set to "800" during a round of a jackpot game, and the relief time reduction counter may be initialized to "800" at the start or end of the ending period of a jackpot game. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100 IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the opening of the big winning hole to measure the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state (step 100 IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets the relief time saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 800 time saving times (see steps 100IWS172 and S173). By executing the processing in steps 100IWS143 and S144, in this example, if the time saving state is controlled to be shortened by taking the relief time shortening as an opportunity, the fluctuation display is executed 800 times without hitting the jackpot or losing the time shortening. Taking this as an opportunity, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. Thereafter, if the next jackpot or time saving error does not occur even after performing the variable display 800 times, the second relief time saving occurs and the time saving state is controlled. In addition, in this example, a time reduction error does not occur in a time reduction state triggered by a relief time reduction, but it may occur, and when it occurs, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is reset (that is, "800" is set). ).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the variable probability counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the probability variation counter is 0, the process moves to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variable number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation number counter (step 100IWS147), and checks whether the value of the probability variation number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability variable number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag A, and ends the probability variation state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-hand hit notification end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS153.

In addition, this example shows a case in which the process of steps 100IWS141 to S152 is executed, thereby transitioning to the normal state at the end of the symbol confirmation period in the time shortening final fluctuation or the probability changing final fluctuation, and ending the right hit notification. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the time-saving final fluctuation or the probability-variable final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, this example shows a case where the definite variable state ends and the time saving state also ends in the definite variable final fluctuation, but this is not the only case; it is also possible to end only the definite variable state and continue the time saving state. may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100 IWS154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" if the time saving is missed (Y in step 100 IWS155). (Step 100IWS156). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 100IWS157), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" (step 100IWS158). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 ( Step 100IWS161). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 100IWS162), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "200" (step 100IWS163). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 100IWS164). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, the relief time reduction counter is set to ``800'' due to the time reduction failure, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the time reduction failure, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction failure occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state B designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

In this example, by executing the processing in steps 100IWS166 and S168, when a time-saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the time-saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time-saving state B designation command is executed. By transmitting the image, the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving.

If it is not decided to skip the time saving (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction number counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction number counter to "800". is set (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In addition, in this example, by controlling the time saving state at the timing when the relief time becomes short and also setting the relief time shortening counter (set to "800"), it is possible to cause the relief time shortening to occur continuously. Although the time saving state is configured so that once the time saving occurs, the time saving state continues until the jackpot occurs, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, at the timing when the rescue time is shortened, the rescue time shortening counter is not set, only the time saving state is controlled, and after that, the rescue time shortening counter is set at the timing when the 800-time fluctuation display ends and control is returned to the normal state. (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction number counter, "800" is set, and each time the variable display is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes "0". ”, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, set it to 0, and each time you execute the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter is incremented by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 800. It may be configured to shorten the relief time based on this.

In addition, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, to secure a production period such as mode transition production, but during the symbol confirmation period, the image display device In step 5, the decorative pattern may not be displayed, but only the small pattern may be displayed, so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like.

Furthermore, in this example, a case is shown in which the process of step 100IWS172 is executed to set the number of time reductions to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until relief time reduction occurs, but this is not limited to such an aspect. do not have. For example, in step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" may be set in the time saving number counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 100IWS172, the time saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to a plurality of types of time saving times. For example, if the time saving is shortened the first time, the time saving counter is set to ``100'', and if the saving time is shortened the second time, the time saving counter is set to ``800''. Good too.

Alternatively, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined by the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of time savings is determined by lottery processing, the number of time savings may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of time savings may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIGS. 12-18 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of external output signals externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 12-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Moreover, the jackpot 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the variable display, which shortens the relief time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time saving state is entered at the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state may also be entered when the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed, so if the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started. Also, if the relief time is shortened, it may be shifted to the time shortening state, so if a symbol that is out of the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed, the jackpot 2 signal will be activated at the end of the symbol confirmation period. External output starts.

Note that the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol confirmation period but also during the jackpot game. In addition, this example shows a case where separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) are output in the case where the time saving is missed and the case where the rescue time is shortened, but the dual-purpose external output signal It may be configured to output .

Further, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after outputting the fluctuation stop signal during the pattern determination period.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for a losing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol determination period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol determination period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid signal failure from occurring externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output during the time saving state via the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously outputted even during the time saving state via the rescue time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably determine the type of time saving even during the time saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 12-19 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 100IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

In step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100 IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). It should be noted that whether or not it is a normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the special symbol stop symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 100IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state A designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag and controls to a probability variable state (step 100IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step 100IWS542). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in this feature section 108IW will be explained. FIG. 12-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 108IW. As shown in FIG. 12-20, in the normal state, if a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A ( (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, in the normal state, even if it is a loss, if a time-saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving loss) (see step 100 IWS166). Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after RAM clear processing, jackpot or time shortening failure, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot or time shortening failure occurring) case), the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled (see step 100 IWS173).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the variable probability state, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is again controlled to the variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time is shortened. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100 IWS80), and there is no case where the saving time is shortened. In addition, in the variable probability state, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state A, if a probability variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot suddenly occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the control is performed again. The time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even if the time saving state A is a loss, if a time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled (see step 100 IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, in the time-saving state A, there is no case where the relief time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state B, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see step 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state B is controlled. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even in the case of a loss in the time saving state B, if the time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled again (see step 100 IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). However, if the time saving is off A during the time saving state and the time saving state B is controlled, the time saving state B is continued until the next jackpot occurs (see step 100 IWS160, S161). On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, there is no case where the relief time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state C, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state C is controlled. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, there is no case where the time saving symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). In addition, in the time saving state C, when 800 fluctuation displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled again (see steps 100IWS170 to S173).

In addition, although this example shows a case where the time saving state B is uniformly transferred when a time saving missed symbol is derived and displayed during the time saving state A, the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, it is configured to compare the remaining number of current time saving times with the number of time saving times corresponding to the determined time saving type, and if the remaining number of current time saving times is greater, the current time saving state A is continued as is. It's okay.

In addition, although this example shows a case where when a normal jackpot occurs during time saving state B, the time saving state A is uniformly shifted to, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving number and the number of time saving times corresponding to the normal jackpot (in this example, 100 times), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving number is greater, continue the current time saving state B. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the time saving losing symbol is not derived and displayed during the time saving state C (see Y in step 100 IWS79), but this is not limited to such a mode, for example. , it may be configured such that even in the time saving state C, it can be determined that the time saving is over.

Further, in this example, when the variable probability state is controlled, the variable probability state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that a lottery process is used to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state for each variable display, and the variable probability state may be terminated based on the decision to end the variable probability state.

(Main processing for production control)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIG. 12-21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the production control main processing in the feature section 108IW. In FIG. 12-21, the processes in steps S71 to S76 are similar to those shown in FIG.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process in step 087IWS701, in the image display device 5, in addition to the variable display of the decorative pattern, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, In the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols in the form of a reduced left-center right ornamental symbol is performed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process in step 100IWS702, in the image display device 5, in addition to the fluctuating display of the decorative design, synchronization with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. A variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Moreover, when the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed, the variable display of the 4th symbol is executed on the 4th symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process in step S77 is the same as the process in step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed, the two LEDs arranged above and below alternately turn on and off in the fourth symbol display device 100IW21a, 21b, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth symbol. be done.

Further, when the variation time ends, the fourth symbol, the stop symbol, is displayed as a fixed symbol at the start of the symbol confirmation period. In this case, when a jackpot occurs, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in red as a jackpot symbol. In addition, when the time saving is over, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in a blue light state as a time saving lapse symbol. In addition, in the case of a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed as a loss symbol (no time saving) in a state where they are turned off.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be derived and displayed in a manner that can distinguish the jackpot type and the time saving type. Good too.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a special symbol is provided as the time saving loss symbol of the 4th symbol, but the stop symbol of the 4th symbol is not limited to such an embodiment. may be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 12-22 and 12-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, a variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 100IWS617), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618). ).

The received production control command is one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation A specification command, first symbol confirmation B specification command, first symbol confirmation C specification command, second symbol confirmation A specification command, second symbol confirmation B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmed C designation command is received, the first confirmed C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, a second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, a second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmed C designation command is received, a second confirmed C command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received production control command is a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command (step 100 IWS625), the production control CPU 120 stores the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command in the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 100IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100 IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command in the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 100IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a command to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery (step 100 IWS629), the effect control CPU 120, based on the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery, causes the image display device 5 to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery. Control is performed to display the initial roll according to the number of times (step 100 IWS 630). For example, if the received EXT data of the command to specify the number of times to shorten rescue time during recovery is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the time to save is reduced is 100 or less), the initial roll is "112". is displayed, indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 or less. For example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "02 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less), the initial The result is displayed as "223", indicating that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less. For example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial "889" is displayed as the result, indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less.

In addition to displaying the initial result indicating the number of fluctuations remaining when power is restored, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, a display indicating the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened may be displayed. , a combination of symbols indicating the remaining number of fluctuations may be displayed. In addition, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after the power is restored, a display suggesting the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened, or a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations, etc. The configuration may be such that the suggestion display is performed at a relatively early stage. Further, the configuration may be such that the number of remaining changes until the rescue time is shortened due to the initial roll is not suggested (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time is shortened due to the initial roll is not indicated). (The remaining number of fluctuations may not be suggested).

If the received production control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. (Step 100IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a time-saving state A designation command (step 100 IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, sunset) corresponding to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to a yellow background image (according to the mode) (step 100IWS634).

If the received production control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 100 IWS635), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to a green background image corresponding to the forest mode (step 100IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100 IWS637), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to an orange background image corresponding to the orange field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even if the time saving state is the same, it is determined whether it is a time saving state via jackpot, a time saving state via time saving, or a time saving state via rescue time saving. Display different background images depending on the With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in gaming status, and it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this example, a common background image is displayed regardless of the time saving state via jackpot, time saving state via time saving loss, or time saving state via rescue time saving. may be configured. For example, a common background image is displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image is displayed in the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. It may be configured as follows.

If the received production control command is a probability variable state designation command (step 100 IWS639), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS640).

If the received production control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In addition, in this example, the right hit notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when a time-saving missed symbol is derived and displayed or when a rescue time is shortened (see steps 100IWS1126 and S1134). , the lighting of the right hit notification LED 100IW20 is started at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

If the received production control command is a right-handed hitting notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command or setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 100 IWS645 ). For example, if a special winning slot winning designation command is received, a winning slot winning flag indicating that a winning slot has been won is set. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration performance control process)
FIG. 12-24 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demonstration performance control process. As mentioned above, in this example, at the end of the symbol confirmation period and at the end of the jackpot game, if no pending memory is stored (that is, when the total number of pending memories is 0), the performance control board is transferred from the main board 11. A customer waiting demonstration designation command is sent to No. 12.

When the customer waiting demo designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 will perform a performance control CPU 120 if 10 seconds have elapsed without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winnings after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. (Y in step 105 IWS 250), a telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105 IWS 251).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop indicating that the rescue time saving function is installed during a period when no variable display is performed. In step 105 IWS251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display a telop.

FIG. 12-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. Of FIGS. 12-25, FIG. 12-25(A) is a subtitle display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. 12-25(B) is This is a telop display execution lottery table used when the number is set to "6".

As shown in FIGS. 12-25(A) and 12-25(B), in this example, the ratio of displaying telops while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened based on the presence or absence of a telop display while waiting for a customer.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying subtitles while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it is possible to indicate whether an advantageous setting value has been set based on the presence or absence of a telop display while waiting for a customer.

Although FIG. 12-25 shows an example of setting value 1 and setting value 6 to simplify the explanation, it is also possible to provide a table corresponding to each setting value, or to provide a table corresponding to each setting value. A table corresponding to the set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is determined to execute the telop display (Y in step 105IWS252), the performance control CPU 120 executes a telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, telop display is started (step 105 IWS 254).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop using a red presentation mode and a blue presentation mode. In step 105 IWS253, the presentation mode of the telop display is determined by lottery.

Figure 12-25(C) is a subtitle mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and Figure 12-25(D) is a drawing table for determining the telop format used when the setting value is set to "6". This is a lottery table for determining the telop format used when

As shown in FIGS. 12-25(C) and (D), in this example, the presentation mode of the telop displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to differ depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened by the display mode of the telop while waiting for a customer.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-25(C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the performance mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous setting value has been set depending on the presentation mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, if 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winning (Y in step 105 IWS255), the performance control CPU 120 starts the demonstration. The movie is played back (step 105 IWS 256).

Note that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie while waiting for the customer end when the performance control command etc. at the time of starting winning is received.

FIG. 12-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of telop display. In the example shown in FIG. 12-26, the screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C), or in the order of (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 12-26(A), if the pending memory is not stored when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the production control board 12 side, 10 seconds have passed without receiving any other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, and the telop while waiting for the customer is displayed. If it is determined to do so, a telop display indicating that the rescue time saving function is installed is displayed on the image display device 5.

At this time, if it has been decided to display the telop display according to the blue presentation mode, the telop display 108IW001 with blue edges is displayed (in the example of Figure 12-26(B), the edges are white). ). In addition, if it is decided to display a subtitle display according to the red presentation mode, the subtitle display 108IW002 with a red edge is displayed (in the example of Figure 12-26 (D), the subtitle display with a black edge is displayed). ).

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the performance control board 12 side, if 3 minutes elapse without receiving any other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, a demonstration is displayed on the image display device 5. The movie is played. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 12-26(C) and (E), the telop display continues to be displayed even while the demonstration movie is being played.

(Pre-read notice setting process)
FIG. 12-27 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the production control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the starting winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns is executed based on the extracted random numbers. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, pre-reading judgment, etc. It will be done. The effect control command at the time of start winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is transferred from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

In the pre-read preview setting process (step S161), for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the production control CPU 120 sends production control commands at the time of starting winnings (for example, production control commands for specifying the occurrence of starting winnings, the number of pending memories, pre-reading judgments, etc.). ) is received (step 108 IWS701).

If the production control command at the time of starting winning is received, the production control CPU 120 determines that the number of pending memories including the pending memory that newly received the production control command at the time of starting winning is greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. It is determined whether the number is large (step 108 IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the starting winning is to be executed after the relief time is shortened. If the number of pending memories is not greater than the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of a starting winning is executed after the rescue time is shortened. In this case, the advance notice setting process is ended.

In this example, by executing the process in step 108IWS702, a look-ahead preview effect is created that targets the variable display when the relief time becomes short among the variable displays corresponding to the suspended memory stored before the relief time becomes short. While it is possible to execute it, it restricts the execution of a look-ahead preview effect that targets a variable display subsequent to the variable display when the relief time is shortened. In other words, it is configured to restrict the execution of the pre-read preview performance across the relief time reduction period where the gaming state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation contents.

If the number of pending memories is greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of a starting winning is executed before the relief time is shortened, The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance, and the performance type and performance mode in the case of execution (step 108 IWS703).

FIG. 12-28 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a pre-read preview performance execution determination table, a pre-read preview performance type determination table, and a pre-read preview performance mode determination table. In step 108IWS703, each table shown in FIG. 12-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect, and if so, the effect type and effect mode.

Specifically, when the gaming state is different from the time-saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice effect using the pre-read notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(A). However, when the gaming state is the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance using the pre-read notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(B).

As shown in Figures 12-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the pre-read preview performance can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot and a jackpot. The configuration is such that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is higher when the result is a failure than when the result is a failure. Therefore, by executing the look-ahead preview performance, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (A) and (B), there is a case where the displayed result is lower in the time saving state C than in the gaming states other than the time saving state C. In addition, the system is configured so that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is low. With such a configuration, in the case of time saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a jackpot does not occur even though the advance notice performance is executed.

In step 108 IWS703, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance, if the gaming state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-read preview performance type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(C) is used to execute If the game state is time-saving state C, the effect type of the pre-read preview effect to be executed is determined using the pre-read preview effect type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(D). Decide on the type. Specifically, the performance type is determined to be either a chance performance or a pending change performance.

The chance eye effect is a variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect when the display result of the change display that is executed before the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect becomes a chance eye (in this example, "778"). This is a performance that suggests that this will be a jackpot. In the chance effect, for example, an effect is performed to incite whether or not the display result will be a chance result ("778" in this example). Also, for example, when a chance eye effect is executed using a red effect mode, a red chance eye effect ("778" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and when a chance eye effect is executed using a blue effect mode. , a blue chance number (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The pending change performance suggests that the variable display that is the target of the advance preview performance will be a jackpot by displaying the pending display that corresponds to the variable display that is the target of the advance preview performance in a display mode that is different from the normal display mode. It is a performance that Also, for example, when a pending change performance is executed in a red production mode, a red pending display is displayed, and when a pending change production is executed in a blue production mode, a blue pending display is displayed. be done.

FIG. 12-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of each type of pre-read preview effect. Among Figures 12-29, Figures 12-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of the chance effect, and Figures 12-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of the hold change effect. This is an example.

When a chance effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the first variable display starts as shown in Figure 12-29 (A1), and then as shown in Figures 12-29 (B1) and (C1). The decorative patterns on the left and right are displayed in a stopped state. Then, as shown in Figure 12-29 (D1), the central decorative pattern stops at either "7", which is the chance number "778", or "6", which is not the chance number "778". A performance that provokes this is carried out. After that, as shown in Figure 12-29 (E1), when the central decorative pattern "7" stops and the chance number "778" stops displaying, a fluctuating display that becomes a jackpot is displayed while it is being held in memory. This suggests the possibility that a corresponding retained memory exists. Note that after the inciting effect is executed, a symbol different from the chance number "778" (for example, "768", etc.) may be stopped and displayed.

When a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-29 (A2) and (B2), when a starting winning occurs, a new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), suggesting the possibility that a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot will be executed based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display. In this example, the display mode of the pending display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Note that the hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in Figure 12-29, but can be performed at any timing after a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode and thereafter until the display of the corresponding hold display and active display ends. The display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the normal mode.

FIG. 12-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the pre-read preview performance in the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via rescue. Among FIGS. 12-30, FIG. 12-30(A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time-saving state via jackpot and the execution period of the advance notice performance, and FIG. 12-30(B) is , is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the pre-read notice performance. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that starting winnings occur at the same timing.

As shown in Figure 12-30 (A), when performing a chance effect as a look-ahead preview effect, in the variable display that is executed from the time when the starting winning occurs until the variable display for the look-ahead target starts. , an effect is performed to incite whether or not the chance pattern will stop, and then the chance pattern will be stopped and displayed. Since such an inciting effect is included, when executing the chance effect, it is necessary to ensure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one fluctuating display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 12-30 (A), when executing a pending change effect as a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display of the pre-reading target is displayed at the timing when a starting prize occurs or from the time when a starting winning occurs. The display mode of the pending display (or active display) changes at any timing over a plurality of variable displays until the display ends. Then, the pending display and active display according to the changed display mode are continued until the variable display of the prefetch target is completed. In other words, when executing a pending change effect, it can be executed at any timing from the time when a starting prize occurs until the variable display of the pre-read target ends, and it continues until the variable display of the pre-read target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead preview performance, the execution period is different between the chance performance and the pending change performance. That is, while the chance effect is executed during a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during one variable display, the pending change effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the time saving state via jackpot, the extremely shortening variation (1.5 seconds) is not executed at the time of loss, and the shortening variation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but in the time saving state via relief In this case, an extremely short variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly performed when the time is off. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-30, in the time saving state via relief, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance effect.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (C) and (D), in the time-saving state via jackpot, it is possible to execute both the chance effect and the pending change effect as the look-ahead preview effect. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, the execution of the chance effect is restricted as a look-ahead preview effect, and only the pending change effect can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute a pre-read preview performance depending on the gaming state.

Further, in step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute the pre-read notice performance, if the gaming state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-read notice performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(E) is used to , determines the presentation mode of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed, and when the gaming state is time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect to be executed is determined using the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(D). Determine the type of performance. Specifically, either the red presentation mode or the blue presentation mode is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 12-28(E) and (F), in this example, it is possible to perform a pre-read preview performance using the red performance mode and the blue performance mode, and the case of a jackpot is better than the case of a miss. The configuration is such that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is higher due to the red effect mode than in the case of . Therefore, by executing the pre-read preview performance in the red performance mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-28(E) and (F), when in the time saving state C, the pre-read preview effect is executed only in the red effect mode. With this configuration, in the case of time-saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the decrease in interest when the pre-read preview performance is executed is suppressed by the blue production mode with low jackpot expectation. be able to. In this example, when in the time saving state C, the pre-read preview effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when the time is off, the pre-read preview effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, the configuration is such that cases in which the display result is incorrect even though the pre-read preview effect is executed in the red effect mode do not occur frequently.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in Figure 12-28, the pre-read notice can be used in the case of time-saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time) and in the case of not time-saving state C. The performance execution ratio, the type of performance, and the ratio of performance modes can be varied, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, execution of the preview performance is restricted (even if only the preview performance with high expectations is not executed). However, the execution of the pre-read preview effect may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be lowered (or not executed). In this case, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the event of a failure may be restricted. It may be configured such that the ratio is lowered (or not executed), or the execution ratio of pre-fetch preview performances of types with high expectations may be lowered (or not executed).

Furthermore, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12-28, for example, even in the time-saving state C, if a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot or a time-saving loss is executed, the execution of the look-ahead preview effect is not restricted. Good too.

When the processing in step 108IWS704 is completed, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for the pre-read preview performance based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is determined to execute the chance effect, a chance effect flag is set in step 108IWS704 as execution setting of the chance effect. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process to be described later, when the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye effect is executed by selecting a process table including the chance eye effect. Note that the chance flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, in step 108IWS704, the hold change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the performance control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when a pseudo series is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 selects a chance pattern (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo series in step 100IWS802. , combinations of jackpot symbols that do not reach reach and symbols that are off by one symbol) are also determined. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "normal jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are the same even-numbered symbol as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a "probable variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (probable variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol. do. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a "sudden probability variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols "135" (sudden probability variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Moreover, even if it is a loss, if it is a "time-saving loss", a combination of decorative symbols of the loss symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. In addition, it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missed symbols including special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) that differ depending on the time saving type. In addition, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is performed, the combination of decorative symbols of the chance eye pattern (in this example, "778") is determined.

For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Regarding the decorative patterns, a stop pattern that reminds you of a jackpot (a combination of patterns whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same pattern) is called a jackpot pattern. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same odd-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a probability-variable jackpot is called a probability-variable jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same even-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a regular jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is called a non-probable variable jackpot symbol. Also, a stop symbol that reminds you of a miss is called a miss symbol.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure the execution settings.

FIG. 12-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution determination table and the preview performance mode determination table. In step 108 IWS802A, if the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice performance using the advance notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), and the relief time is shortened. If the remaining number of times is 10 or less, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance using the preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-32(B). In addition, when it is decided to execute a preview performance, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened exceeds 10, the performance mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in Figure 12-32 (C). However, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, the mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-32(D).

As shown in Figures 12-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the preview effect can be executed both when the display result is a jackpot and when it is a loss. It is configured such that the proportion of execution of the preview performance is higher when the result is a success than when the result is a failure. Therefore, by executing the preview performance, it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation of a jackpot.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (A) and (B), the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). In this case, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is lower when the display result is wrong than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened exceeds 10). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the preview performance is performed during a predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, and the countdown performance and effect performance described later are executed). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the game is executed but does not result in a jackpot.

In addition, during a predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, a period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less), a countdown performance and effect performance, which will be described later, are executed, but at this time, the timer is activated as a preview performance. By restricting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 12-32(C) and (D), in this example, there is a red presentation mode (for example, a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (for example, a blue presentation image is displayed). The system is configured such that the preview performance is executed in a red performance mode at a higher rate in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. Therefore, by executing the preview presentation in the red presentation mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D), the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) If the display result is lower than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is more than 10), a preview effect is executed using the red effect mode. It is structured so that the percentage of With this configuration, the interest when the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode during the predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot. can suppress the decline in

In addition, if the configuration is such that multiple types of preview performances with different jackpot expectations can be executed, the preview performances of types with high jackpot expectations (for example, if the jackpot expectations are classified into 5 levels, The execution is limited only for the type of preview performance where the jackpot expectation level is 4th level or higher) during the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). Good too.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12-32, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less, if a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot or time reduction is executed, a preview effect may be executed. You may choose not to limit it.

In addition, as described above, in this example, in the case of time saving state C, the execution of the pre-read preview effect is restricted, but the execution of the preview effect is also restricted (for example, the execution rate is reduced). In this case, it may be configured to reduce the execution rate (or not execute) of the preview performance in case of a failure, or to reduce the execution rate of the preview performance for types with high expectations. The execution rate may be lowered (or not executed).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800. (Step 100IWS803). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 can be determined by the number of relief time shortening 2, for example. This can be determined by checking whether or not a designated command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the production control CPU 120 will change the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. A process table including an inciting effect corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is selected (step 100 IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is "100". Select the process table that includes the appropriate inciting effect. For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 800), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800". ” Select a process table that includes an inciting effect according to ``. Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is none of 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, and 800, the production control CPU 120 determines that the relief time is shortened. It is checked whether the remaining number of fluctuations is 0 (step 108 IWS805). In addition, whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 can be determined by, for example, checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot (step 108IWS806A). If the display result is not a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry performance that informs that the time-saving state is controlled by the rescue time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player by the time-shortening effect that the game will be controlled to be in a time-shortening state as a rescue time-saving, and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes a time-saving pretense effect that notifies that a jackpot will be achieved after executing the same type of performance as the time-saving effect ( Step 100IWS806C). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player recognizes that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 0, the player is notified that the jackpot has been won, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. It can improve your interest.

In addition, in this example, if the displayed result becomes a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a time saving rush effect is executed using a dedicated relief time saving fluctuation jackpot variation pattern. For example, even if a full rotation effect (that is, a jackpot is confirmed) is executed, which is not executed except when the number of variations of relief time reduction is reached, in which the three decorative symbols are aligned and vary. good. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

Also, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the jackpot as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

In addition, in this example, if the display result is a failure when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern for relief time saving fluctuation is used; It may be possible to use a variation pattern for losing the same as usual, or it may be configured to use a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short variation time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern common between when and before reaching the number of fluctuations for saving time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example, orange) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving). (background image of the display color) (see step 078 IWS638), it is possible to notify that the time saving state will be controlled by reducing the rescue time by this change in the background image.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less ( Step 108IWS807). In addition, to check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and effect performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened. (Step 108IWS808). For example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 10), the count number until the rescue time is shortened is "0A (H)". Select a process table including countdown effects and effect effects corresponding to ``10''. Also, for example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "01 (H)" (the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1), the count until the relief time reduction is reached. A process table including a countdown performance and effect performance corresponding to the number "1" is selected. Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

In this example, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief fluctuation is reached is 10 or less, the countdown performance and the effect performance are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a relief change, and it is possible to increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief fluctuation occurs.

In addition, in this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and an inciting effect or a countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a background specification command that specifies a background image is configured to be sent, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the background specification command and then sent. You can. Then, the performance control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute an inciting performance or a countdown performance.

In addition, in this example, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown performance and effect performance are always executed, but whether or not they are executed by lottery is determined. It may also be possible to decide whether In addition, for example, when the number of fluctuations remaining before becoming a relief fluctuation is not 10 or less, so-called fake countdown performances and effect performances (for example, although they are executed in the same manner as countdown performances and effect performances, , the countdown performance and effect performance corresponding to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but are interrupted in the middle. (See Figure 12-42) are determined by lottery to be executed or not. Good too. In this case, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less is better than when it is not 10 or less. ) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a relief change, and it is possible to increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief fluctuation occurs.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 (N in step 108IWS807), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the execution setting of the chance production has been made (step 108IWS809). , when the execution setting of the chance effect has been made, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes the chance effect (including the effect that stimulates whether or not it will become a chance effect) (step 108 IWS810). . In addition, if the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, a performance in which the chance eye pattern does not stop display after executing the effect to incite whether or not it will be a chance eye effect (so-called false chance eye effect) is executed by lottery. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to do so.

If the chance production is not set to be executed, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 12. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. You can.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display processing)
12-33 and FIG. 12-34 are flowcharts showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Furthermore, the control state for the production device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 controls the mode transition production (production that notifies the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-handed hit. A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS849). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time shortening occurs during the normal state and cases where the rescue time shortens. However, in step 100IWS847, if the time saving is missed during the normal state, a mode transition effect for the time saving is missed and a process table corresponding to the right hit notification is selected, and if the saving time becomes short, the process table for the relief time saving is selected. Select a process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. In addition, whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received due to the relief time reduction is determined, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( This can be determined by checking whether or not H).

If neither the first symbol confirmation A specification command nor the second symbol confirmation A specification command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation B specification command or the second symbol confirmation B specification command has been received. (Step 100IWS851). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuous production (production that notifies that the time saving state continues). (Step 100IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 100IWS854). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received. (Step 100IWS856). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed C-command reception flag or the second confirmed C-command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is received, the process moves to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y at step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y at step 100IWS857), the production control CPU 120 normally A process table corresponding to the symbol confirmation display is selected (step 100IWS858). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 100IWS860). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process moves to steps 100IWS858 and subsequent steps to enter the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, unless the symbol confirmation designation command is missed, there is no case where a determination of Y is made in step 100IWS857 and the process moves to steps 100IWS858 and subsequent steps.

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIG. 12-35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the special figure waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed production period timer (step 100 IWS871), and checks whether the value of the fixed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 100IWS872). If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speakers 8L and 8R as the presentation component) is executed in accordance with n) (step 100IWS874).

Furthermore, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the production control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). Further, the production control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed for confirmation (step 100IWS878). If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fixed manner, the process is immediately terminated. If the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are not being displayed in a fixed manner, the production control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbols (losing symbols (no time saving), losing time reducing symbols, jackpot symbols) (step 100 IWS879 ).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol confirmation period has passed), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 100IWS883). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100 IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command has not been received, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance including a mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the transition to a variable probability state (probability variable mode) or a time saving state (time saving mode)) and a right hit notification. (Step 100IWS885). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speaker 27 as the presentation component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 100 IWS887).

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the production process during the jackpot (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing symbol (no time saving) or the time reducing symbol is stopped and displayed), the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag to the variable display start waiting process. (Step S170) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 100IWS889).

(Production execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time will be explained. FIG. 12-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time. As shown in Figure 12-36, in the variation display immediately before the variation display that results in a relief time reduction (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and decorative symbol ends, and the missing symbol (no time reduction) is displayed. When is stopped and displayed, a missed symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol. (See step 108IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the missed symbols (no time savings) are stopped and displayed, the missed symbols (no time savings) are confirmed and displayed for a 20 second symbol confirmation period (see step 100 IWS1135). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol confirmation period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, right hit notification is started on the image display device 5 (see step 100 IWS847). Next, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 12-36, the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example In this case, the display color is switched to (background image with an orange display color) (see step 100IWS638). With this configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the effect when switching the gaming state, and also to improve the interest. can be improved.

(Example of production)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be explained. FIGS. 12-37 to 12-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of presentation modes up to the transition to the time saving state. Note that in FIGS. 12-37 to 12-40, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 12-37(A), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbol stops. In this example, in the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed at the center of the screen, and a small pattern 100IW101 is displayed at the upper right. For example, when there are 800 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, it is assumed that the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 stop and a missed pattern (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, which says, "Relief time saving starts in 800 rotations!". Further, at this time, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of a saving time saving function and an effect of saving saving time) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine that is equipped with a shortened rescue time.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-37(B), for example, when there are 700 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 stop and the pattern (in this example, "423") stops. It is assumed that a combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similar to FIG. 12-37(A), a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner saying, "Relief time saving starts in 700 rotations!". Further, at this time, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of a saving time saving function and an effect of saving saving time) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 100IW103.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B), a case is shown in which an inciting effect indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the incitement effect is not executed when the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 400 to 800 times, and the incitement effect is performed when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300, 200, or 100 times). It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the inciting effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is received, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers, and when it is decided to execute the inciting effect, The configuration may be such that the excitement effect is executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened decreases, the execution rate of the inciting effect increases.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-37 (C) to 12-38 (E), when there are 10 revolutions remaining until the transition to short rescue time, a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the number of remaining revolutions is displayed in the center of the screen. Ru. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a countdown from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which out-of-place symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", and "123") are derived and displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-37 (C) to 12-38 (E), after 10 revolutions remain until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, effect displays 100IW104B are displayed in a range corresponding to the remaining revolutions. . In this example, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed so that the range in which it is displayed becomes wider (the number of effects displayed increases) as the remaining number of revolutions decreases (that is, as the time for relief approaches the time).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the pattern stops and the missing pattern (in this example, It is assumed that a combination of symbols "123" is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (F), when there are 0 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 (that is, the variable display that reduces the relief time) starts. , as shown in FIG. 12-38 (G), a time-saving entry effect is started to notify that the time-saving state (relief time reduction) is being controlled, and a time-saving entry effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game is controlled to be in a time saving state (relief time saving), and it is possible to improve interest when the time saving state (relief time saving) is entered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-38(G), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38(H), when the symbols are stopped, the decorative symbols 100IW100 are not displayed, and only the small symbols 100IW101 (in this example, a combination of "254" symbols) are derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving production, it is also possible to make notifications that are generally carried out during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take out a prepaid card or a warning notification to prevent getting hooked, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer. may be displayed. In this case, the notification in the time-saving rush performance may be made in the same manner as in the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may not be made during the time-saving rush effect, but may be made during the ending period of the first jackpot after transitioning to the time-saving state due to the relief time reduction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(I), when the symbol determination period begins, a mode effect start display 100IW105 of "Very hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. Note that from now on, even in the mode transition performance, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggestion image 100IW 106 that suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 12-1) is displayed. Ru. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the words "Press" are displayed together with an image urging the user to press the push button 31B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation suggestion image 100IW106 was displayed, "V A character display 100IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. Further, a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

In addition, in this example, even in the case of a jackpot, it can be configured to execute an effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK x 1" similarly to FIG. 12-39(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a pre-reading judgment process on whether or not there will be a jackpot and the type of variation pattern in the starting winning judgment process (step S101), and Sends a prefetch judgment result specification command that allows the result to be specified. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance similar to that shown in FIG. 12-39 (K) (so-called suspended continuous performance) based on the received pre-reading determination result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the pending consecutive performance is displayed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Execute. Also, for example, if it is determined that there are two jackpots in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 2" will be displayed. Execute a continuous performance.

On the other hand, in the case of shortening the rescue time, there is a high probability that a fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time shortening state via the shortening rescue time (see Figure 12-8 (E)). ), the fluctuating display is digested extremely quickly, and it is easy to hit the jackpot relatively quickly. Therefore, in the variable display where the relief time is shortened (in this example, the symbol confirmation period), the character display "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 12-39 (K) is displayed without particularly checking the look-ahead judgment result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect that displays the characters "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 12-39 (K) is similar to the pseudo-hold continuous effect, and it also shortens the rescue time. The performance is intended to inform the public.

Although the case where the display of the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 starts from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 that reads "V STOCK x 1" has been shown, the display start timing of the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 100IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 12-38(H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting a rescue time saving effect mode is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without selecting a production mode, the production mode that the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-40(M), when the selection of the performance mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. For example, the words "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, a transition is made to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rush production will be explained. FIG. 12-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode of the time-saving rush performance. The example shown in FIG. 12-41 is performed following the example shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) to (D).

As shown in Figure 12-41 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the pattern stops and the missing pattern (in this example, "123 It is assumed that the symbol combination ``'' is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (F'), there are 0 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time saving mode, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is started. It should be noted that although this variable display can shorten the rescue time, the display result is a jackpot. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, the game does not shift to a time saving state due to relief time saving, but shifts to a jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (G'), the time-saving rush performance is started, and the time-saving rush performance display 100IW104C having the same aspect as the time-saving rush performance is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (G'), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed, just like when the time-saving rush effect is started. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (H), when the display of the time-saving effect display 100IW104C ends, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed when the pattern stops, and the small pattern 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol "254" combinations) are derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is stopped, and the jackpot pattern (in this example, a combination of "777" symbols) is derived and displayed. After that, the game shifts to a jackpot game. With this configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time reduction has been achieved, he is informed that he has won the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase his interest.

In addition, the configuration of this feature section 108IW can also be used to execute a bonus game in which the game ball is controlled to be a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V prize) in a specific area (V prize winning area) in a prize object during a small prize game. When applied to a gaming machine that is configured to enable this, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the rescue time is a small hit, a time saving effect is executed to notify that a small hit has occurred. Good too.

Next, the so-called fake countdown performance and effect performance will be explained. FIG. 12-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a so-called fake countdown performance and effect performance.

As shown in Figures 12-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a so-called fake countdown effect is executed, so that the number of remaining rotations is reduced to 10 rotations. A countdown display 100IW104A depending on the situation is displayed at the center of the screen. Then, each time the variable display of the symbols ends and the symbols stop, a countdown from "10" is displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a so-called fake effect is executed, so that the remaining rotations are reduced to 10 rotations. Effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range depending on the number of times. Then, each time the variable display of the symbols ends and the symbols stop, the effect display 100IW 104B is displayed so that the range in which it is displayed becomes wider (the number of effects displayed increases).

As shown in FIG. 12-42(E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are is terminated. At this time, since the number of rotations remaining until the transition to rescue time saving is not 0, the time saving entry effect is not executed.

When configuring so-called fake countdown effects and effect effects as shown in Figure 12-42 to be executable, the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B). You may choose not to perform any inciting effects that suggest this. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish whether it is genuine or fake.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the performance in the relief time shortening is explained, and a countdown is displayed, but it may be displayed when the symbol starts to fluctuate or while the symbol is fluctuating.

In addition, this example shows a case where a pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in a variable display that shortens the relief time and the mode transition effect and right hit notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is the usual 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to directly shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving mode without performing any mode transition effect or the like.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when executing the RAM clearing process, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is missed. If the configuration is configured to execute a story (such as a story with high-speed fluctuation, etc.), the selection buffer and story counter of that story may also be cleared. Further, it may be configured such that a story can be set when the relief time reduction is activated, or a different story can be set depending on the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the feature section 108IW, the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than the normal 0.5 seconds, in the variable display that shortens the rescue time, and the mode transition performance and right hit notification are executed during the symbol confirmation period. Although shown, the processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the pattern confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period is set until the next variation starts, and the mode transition effect and right-hand hit notification are executed during the postponement period. You may. Hereinafter, a first modification will be described in which a postponement period is provided until the start of the next variation and the mode transition effect and right-handed hit notification are executed.

FIG. 12-43 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing in modification 1. As shown in FIG. 12-43, in modification 1, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 5, the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is included in the special symbol process process. In addition, in the first modification, the starting winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is the same as the starting winning determining process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". Further, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". Moreover, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". Moreover, the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3".

Further, the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4".

Moreover, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". Further, the jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". Further, the jackpot release post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Moreover, the jackpot end process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8".

Moreover, the small hit opening preprocessing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". Moreover, the small hit opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". Moreover, the small hit end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "11".

In modification 1, the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) are the same as the special symbol normal processing (step S110) and variation pattern setting processing (step S111) shown in FIG. It is. In addition, in modification example 1, in the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113), even if the relief time is shortened, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as usual. This differs from the special symbol variation process (step S112) and special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. 5 in that the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is transmitted.

In addition, in modification 1, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) to the small hit ending process (step 100IWS121) are the same as the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) to the small winning ending process (step S120) shown in FIG. It is similar to

FIG. 12-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in modification 1. In modification 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is similar to those shown in FIGS. 12-16 and 12-17. In modification example 1, when the relief time saving determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined postponement period (in this example, 20 seconds) to the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next change. A value corresponding to is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). Note that the process in step 100IWS175 is similar to the process shown in FIG. 12-17.

FIG. 12-45 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in Modification 1. In the next change postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and checks whether the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). . If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the relief time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In addition, in Modification 1, in the next change postponement process, a case is shown in which the time reduction state is entered at the timing when the postponement period (in this example, 20 seconds) until the start of the next change has elapsed. It is not limited to the form. For example, it may be configured such that a right-handed notification is given in the next variation postponement process, and the time reduction state is entered at the start of the postponement period or in the middle of the postponement period until the start of the next variation. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, the time saving state may be controlled and the right-handed hit notification may be performed, or the time saving state may not be controlled and only the right-handed hitting notification is performed. There are many possible ways.

Further, in the first modification, a case is shown in which 20 seconds is uniformly measured as the postponement period in the next change postponement process, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the configuration is configured so that the relief time reduction can occur continuously, the time reduction will be different if the relief time reduction occurs during normal state. A different postponement period may be set depending on the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, if the relief time is shortened during the time saving state, a shorter postponement period is set compared to the case where the relief time is shortened during the normal state, and it is measured in the next change postponement process, and the relief time is shortened from the second time onward. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Further, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decorative pattern, but displays only the small pattern, and is configured so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like. Good too.

In addition, in modification 1, when the relief time is shortened, the next change postponement process is executed to extend the period until the next change starts, but this is not limited to such a mode. The present invention may also be applied to a configuration in which the next variation postponement process similar to Modification Example 1 is executed to extend the period until the next variation is started.

Further, as described above, if the present invention is also applied to the display of fluctuations in time reduction, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 12-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next fluctuation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the symbol confirmation period for the fluctuating display in the event of a time shortening can be made common to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal fluctuating display, and processing related to right hit notification etc. can also be done in the case of relief time shortening, etc. can be executed in the same process.

FIG. 12-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in Modification 1. As shown in FIG. 12-46, in modification example 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the rescue time (the value of the rescue time shortening counter is 1), the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol ends, and the When the symbol (no time saver) is stopped and displayed, the missed symbol (no time saver) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol. (See step 108IWS806B). Then, when the fluctuating display of the special symbols is finished and the losing symbols (no time savings) are stopped and displayed, the missing symbols (no time savings) are confirmed and displayed for the same 0.5 second symbol confirmation period as usual (step 078 IWS1135 reference). Next, when the 0.5 second symbol determination period ends, the process moves to a 20 second next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIG. 12-46 (see step 100 IWS114). Then, during the next change postponement period, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 12-46. Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the next fluctuation postponement period, right-handed hit notification is started on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 12-46. Next, when the next change postponement period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. In the example, the background image is switched to an orange display color.

In the case of configuring as in Modification 1, a fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for the losing symbol, and after the symbol determination period has elapsed, the fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (i.e., the start of the next fluctuation postponement period). (at the start), four jackpot signals may be output. The jackpot 4 signal here is a signal that is output to the outside during the next variation postponement period after the symbol confirmation period of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure to receive signals externally.

Furthermore, in the case of the configuration as in Modification 1, at the start of the next variation postponement process (that is, at the start of the next variation postponement period), the player is in a gaming state in which it is assumed that he or she will play right-handed. A test signal or an external output signal indicating this may be output, or a right-handed hit notification may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to right-handed hitting and to notify right-handed hitting at an appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the characteristic section 108IW described above, during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time reduction, the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 12-8 (E)) is uniformly selected to cause the high-speed variation of 1.5 seconds. Although the case where the display is executed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. Modifications 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving is different will be described below. FIG. 12-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the variation pattern selection method during the time saving state based on the relief time reduction.

First, using FIG. 12-47(A), a method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving in Modification 2 will be described. In the feature section 108IW mentioned above, either the case is a case where the fluctuating display is executed 800 times after the RAM clearing process (without becoming a jackpot or a time saver error), or after a jackpot or a time saver miss (the next jackpot or a time saver miss). 12-8 (F), (G) ) is selected and a variable display of 5 seconds or 12 seconds is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and effect effect, and after the rescue time is shortened and the time saving state is controlled, the variable pattern table E (see figure 1) is uniformly displayed. 12-8(E)) is selected and a high-speed fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in Modification 2 of FIG. 12-47, when the relief time is shortened by performing 800 fluctuation displays after the RAM clearing process, from 10 fluctuations before to 1 fluctuation before the rescue time is shortened. also selects fluctuation pattern table B (see Figure 12-7 (B)) and executes the same fluctuation display as normal, and after being controlled to the time saving state based on the relief time reduction, fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 12-7 (B)) is selected. (C)) may be selected to select a variation pattern similar to the time saving state during the jackpot, and the 5-second variation display may be executed at a high rate.

For example, as shown in Modification 3 of Figure 12-47, in the case where the relief time is shortened by executing 800 fluctuation displays after a jackpot, the fluctuation display when executing the 800th fluctuation display From the pattern table I (see FIG. 12-8 (I)), a variation pattern for relief time reduction variation (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) is selected, and a variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. Note that the feature section 108IW described above is configured to execute a time-saving rush effect during a variable display, and to execute a mode transition effect and right hit notification during a symbol confirmation period, but for example, during a 25-second variable display. It may be configured so that a mode transition effect or a right hit notification is executed in (Accordingly, in this case, the symbol confirmation period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIG. 12-47, the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display that shortens the rescue time is different between the case where the rescue time is shortened after RAM clear processing and the case where the rescue time is shortened after a jackpot. In addition, the effects can be made different by changing the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display after transitioning to the time saving state via the rescue time reduction.

For example, as shown in modification example 4 of FIG. 12-47, the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 12-7 (B)) may be selected even from 10 variations before to 1 variation, which shortens the rescue time. Execute the same fluctuation display as usual, and select the fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 12-7 (C)) during the time saving state based on the first relief time reduction to display the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving state when going through the jackpot. is selected to execute a 5-second fluctuation display at a high rate, and during the time saving state based on the second relief time reduction, select fluctuation pattern table E (see Figure 12-8 (E)) to display a 1.5-second high-speed display. It may be configured to perform a variation display of variation.

(Example 2)
Next, a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the feature section 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-48 to 12-54. Note that, regarding the second embodiment, mainly the parts that are different from the first embodiment will be explained.

In the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is soon shortened. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 12-8(F) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table G as shown in FIG. 12-8(G) are used immediately before the relief time is shortened. No variation pattern table is provided for this purpose. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 12-8 (F) and (G) only immediately before the relief time is shortened, the player will not be aware of the fact that the relief time is just before the shortening due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern. However, by not using such a variation pattern table, it is possible to prevent this from being noticed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variation display that shortens the rescue time is not a dedicated variation pattern for shortening the rescue time, but a variation pattern that is also used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 12-8(I) of the first embodiment and the variation pattern table J as shown in FIG. 12-8(J) are used to reduce the relief time. There is no variation pattern table provided for variations when this occurs. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the variation pattern common between when the relief time is shortened and before the relief time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 12-48 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 12-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 creates a fluctuation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) as a table for determining the variation pattern. H is selected (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 12-7(C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1712 is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via the relief time-saving method, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8(E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table E for the deviation during the time saving state controlled via the IWS is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is also not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 will be used (step 100IWS1716).

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demonstration performance control process in Example 2)
As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is soon shortened. Therefore, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a caption indicating that the rescue time-saving function is provided is displayed (see Figure 12-26), but the execution or non-execution of this caption display and the mode of presentation may vary. There is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the time is shortened or that the time for relief is near. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a telop explaining the reduction in relief time is always displayed in a common manner.

In the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to suggest the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened or that the rescue time is soon to be shortened, depending on whether or not the telop display is executed and the presentation mode. However, during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the caption display is more restricted than in the period before that (for example, the execution rate decreases, (or not) is desirable. With this configuration, when the rescue time is shortened, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time saving control is to be started due to the rescue time shortening) is suddenly executed, giving the player a surprise. You can improve your interest by giving.

(Variable display start setting process in Example 2)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 12-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the production control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure the execution settings.

FIG. 12-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution determination table and the preview performance mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, regardless of the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance using the preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-50(A). Furthermore, when it is determined to execute the preview performance, the performance mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-50(B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-50(A) and (B), regardless of the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened, whether or not to execute the preview effect and the mode of effect when executed are as follows. It is configured to be determined by a common ratio. Also, in the second embodiment, when the relief time is shortened and the transition is made to the time saving state C, as in the first embodiment, a background image corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed on the image display device 5. (In this example, the background image has an orange display color) (see step 078 IWS638). With such a configuration, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time-saving control is to be started due to relief time-saving) is suddenly executed, so it is possible to provide a surprise to the player and increase interest. can.

As mentioned above, in the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near, so the inciting performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, Processing for executing a countdown presentation, effect presentation, and processing for displaying an initial roll according to the number of times until the rescue time is shortened are omitted.

In the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to perform an inciting effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. However, during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining is 10 or less), the execution of incitement effects, countdown effects, and effect effects are more restricted than in the previous period (for example, , the execution rate is reduced, or it is not executed at all). With this configuration, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time saving control is to be started due to relief time saving) is suddenly executed, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing interest. be able to.

Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display that shortens the rescue time is not a dedicated variation pattern for shortening the rescue time, but a variation pattern that is also used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1). (normal fluctuation)) is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the process for executing the time-saving rush effect or the time-saving rush effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is performed, a change in the background image (i.e., notification that time saving control by saving time saving is to be started) is suddenly executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and increase their interest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in Example 2)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 12-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in the second embodiment.

As shown in Figure 12-51, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the rescue time (the value of the rescue time shortening counter is 1), the special symbol variable time ( For example, when 12 seconds) have elapsed, the losing symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, and the losing symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display (see step 100 IWS74, S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and the relief time is shortened at the start of the variable display, the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started in the same way as the previous variable display. It ends when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has passed, and when the winning symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the winning symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period. (See step 100IWS1137). When the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 12-51, the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example In this case, the display color is switched to (background image with an orange display color) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated. Further, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-51, during a period in which variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after transitioning to time saving state C, right-handed hit notification is performed (FIG. 12-52 (C1 )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player aware that the player is in a right-handed playing state while suppressing the complexity of the presentation related to the transition to the time-saving state C, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages for the player. can be suppressed.

(Example of production in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, will be explained. FIG. 12-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state. In FIG. 12-52, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (A), when the special symbol variation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the variable display that shortens the relief time, the display is displayed as shown in FIG. 12-52 (B). Then, a decorative pattern 100IW100 and a small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of missed patterns.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has passed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C1), in the image display device 5, the time saving state The background image is switched to a background image with a display color of orange (in this example, a background image with an orange display color), and right-handed hitting notification is executed.

If the pending memory is not stored after the symbol confirmation period has passed, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C2), the image display device 5 In this case, the background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) may be switched to, and the right hit notification may be executed.

Furthermore, at the timings shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2), an explanation regarding saving time saving using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) and (B) (for example, the relief time saving function and (explanation of the performance) may also be performed. In addition, although the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened and the effects that suggest that the rescue time is near are not executed, the subtitles 100IW103 as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B) are displayed at any timing. may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in Figure 12-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that time saving control by saving time saving will start) is suddenly executed, giving the player a surprise and increasing their interest. can be improved.

Further, it is possible to clearly inform the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve interest when the relief time is shortened. Further, it is possible to make the variation pattern common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-52. For example, a modification 1 shown in FIG. 12-53 or a modification 2 shown in FIG. 12-53 may be used.

(Example of production in Example 2 [Modification 1])
FIG. 12-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to saving time saving in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2.

In modification example 1 shown in FIG. 12-53, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (A), after the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the variable display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (B), a time-saving effect (blackout effect) is executed in which the effect display that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) is made difficult to see. be done.

Then, when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 12-53 (C), the blackout state is resolved, and the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are removed and derived by the combination of symbols. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. The background image is switched to a background image with a display color of orange (in this example, a background image with an orange display color), and right-handed hitting notification is executed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 12-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image display or a sound effect is output to notify that the time saving state (relief time saving) control is to be started. Good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 12-53 can be created, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a variable display that shortens the rescue time in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

(Example of production in Example 2 [Modified Example 2])
FIG. 12-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to saving time saving in the second modification of the second embodiment.

In modification example 2 shown in FIG. 12-54, as shown in FIG. 12-54 (A), a variable display that shortens the relief time is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variable time (for example, 12 seconds) is started. For example, after 8 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 12-54(B), on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of broken patterns. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 12-54(B), the special symbol variation time has not elapsed, so the small symbols 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-54(C), on the image display device 5, a time-saving effect (blackout effect) that makes the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) difficult to see is performed. executed. Further, the special symbol variation time elapses while the time-saving entry performance (blackout performance) is being executed, and the small symbols 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of missed symbols. The time-saving rush performance (blackout performance) continues to be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, the blackout state is resolved in the image display device 5 and the time saving state C ( The background image is switched to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) according to the time saving state (via the rescue time saving state). Further, as shown in FIG. 12-54(D), a right-handed hit notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 12-53 can be created, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a variable display that shortens the rescue time in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

In addition, at the timings of FIGS. 12-53 (C), (D), FIGS. 12-54 (C), (D), etc., relief by the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A), (B) is performed. An explanation regarding time saving (for example, an explanation of a rescue time saving function or an effect of saving time saving) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the first embodiment of the characteristic part 108IW shown above, a variation pattern that becomes a super reach is determined in a period before the relief time becomes short (for example, a period in which the number of remaining variations until a relief variation occurs is 10 or less). , deciding to execute a notice performance is restricted, while in the second embodiment, it is configured so that neither of them is restricted, but by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened. In the period (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining before becoming a relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and the preview of the type of preview performance for which the expectation level is not very high is determined. The performance may be made executable. In other words, it may be possible to limit the determination of a variation pattern that is a super reach, and to restrict the execution of a type of preview performance with a high degree of expectation among the preview performances.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened and the effect that suggests that the relief time is near (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect) include an inciting effect, a countdown effect, Effects may be executed, an initial roll will be made according to the number of times until the rescue time is shortened, and a subtitle display while waiting for a customer (for example, subtitle display 108IW101 shown in Figure 12-26) may be displayed. Unlimited. For example, an operation effect in which the movable body 32 is operated at any timing during a variable display or while the variation is stopped, a light emission effect in which a light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a specific mode (for example, in a rainbow pattern), and a light emission effect in which the movable body 32 The number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened or the fact that the rescue time is almost shortened may be suggested by the execution frequency and execution mode of a vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc.

In addition, in the feature section 108IW and each modification shown above, the effect control command (for example, the effect control command to instruct recovery from a power outage or the effect control command to instruct initialization) that is transmitted when the power is turned on. , If the performance control board 12 cannot receive the command normally (for example, if the command is missed or the command is garbled), the normal Although it is possible to carry out the effect, it may not be possible to execute the relief suggestion effect that suggests the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near (note that once a jackpot has occurred, it may not be possible to execute possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to incorrect relief suggestion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above, a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (in this example, each time a variation display is executed, the command is sent If it is not possible to normally receive the message (given), the relief suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggestion performance may not be executed only during the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction number 1 specified command or the relief time reduction number 2 specification command could not be received normally, or the relief suggestion effect may not be executed until the next jackpot occurs. The suggestive performance may not be executed. Also, for example, if the reception cannot be received normally, the relief suggestion effect is executed in a manner and execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that will shorten the relief time is large (that is, the relief time is not close to being shortened). It's okay. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to incorrect relief suggestion performance.

In addition, although the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variable display result, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a jackpot game that controls a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V winning area) in a specific area (V winning area) of a jackpot during a small winning game; The configuration for controlling the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the feature section 108IW and each modification shown above may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, depending on whether the RAM clearing process is executed or when a jackpot occurs, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900", or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be randomly set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above showed the case where the time saving flag C is set every time the relief time saving occurs, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numeric value) that is set when the second time saving time is transferred again may be different from the time saving flag (third numeric value) that is set when the first time saving time is being saved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving state after a jackpot and the rescue time saving state are different effects (fluctuation patterns) is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same performance (fluctuation pattern) may be used for the time saving state after the jackpot and the rescue time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification (such as the notification in Figure 12-39 (K) or notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition) is made just before the end of the time saving state after a jackpot and just before the start of the relief time saving, good.

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above have shown the case where the time-saving state of time-saving failure and the relief time-saving state are different effects (fluctuation patterns), it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same effect (variation pattern) may be used for the time saving state where the time saving is missed and the rescue time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification (such as the notification in Figure 12-39 (K) or notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition) is made just before the end of the time saving state when the time saving is missed and just before the start of the relief time saving, good.

As explained above, the present feature section 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1A) to (means 8A).

(Means 1A) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means can update the numerical information by the update means. When the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of variable display, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in Figures 12-13, game control As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the microcomputer 100 for game control), the updating means updates the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 12-49 108IWS811) and a special notification effect that notifies that control of the special state will start based on the establishment of special conditions (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2)). 12-53 (B), blackout at the start of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 12-54 (C), blackout at the end of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 12-54 (C), etc.) The predetermined suggestion performance execution means further includes a performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-23, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638), and the predetermined suggestion performance execution means, in a period before the special condition is satisfied, The rate at which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed is common (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-44, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 12-50). According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification performance is such that the special notification performance is executed in the display means. This is a mode in which the effect display displayed before the start is difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-53(B), it is blacked out at the start of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, a variable display execution means capable of variably displaying identification information for presentation (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information is provided. In addition, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing a special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification performance is in a form that makes the performance identification information difficult to see (for example, , blackout occurs at the end of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 12-54(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification performance is This is a mode in which the background display in the means is changed to a background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in Figure 12-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) Any one of the means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, FIGS. 12-52 (C1), (C2) ), at the timings shown in FIGS. 12-53 (D) and 12-54 (D), an explanation will be given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any one of the means 1A to 5A, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 selects a variable pattern as shown in FIG. 12-48). When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (normally variable )), and the special notification performance execution means can execute the special notification performance after a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and it is also possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest when the event is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to 6A, a variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a step A part that executes S112), a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer and a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. a buffer), a backup storage means (e.g. RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the reservation information stored in the reservation storage means even if the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, Initialization means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process that initializes the storage contents of the backup storage means, and the backup storage A recovery means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6 part) and. According to such a configuration, while optimizing control through initialization processing, a power outage occurs in a situation where a hold memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player when playing the game.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of time saving flags A to C) that can specify that the special state is being controlled; Execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (for example, the value of a time saving count counter) that can specify the number of times variable display has been executed in a state, and special status information and execution count information that can be stored even when power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g. RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information, and an initialization means (e.g. game control (a part in which the microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means has special status information, execution number information, and numerical information stored in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, in the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the states of the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter are initialized). However, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power cut is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) are disclosed.

(Means 1B) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern, and a variable display pattern that is more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including specific variable display patterns with long display periods (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) pattern determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-14), and the state controlling means variably displays the numerical information updated by the updating means. When a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when it is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-7). As shown in A) and (B), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined in both cases of jackpot and miss. ), when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the percentage of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(A), the variable pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) are more likely to be determined in the event of a jackpot than fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), and special conditions are met. In the previous predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, in Figure 12-8 ( As shown in F) and (G), just before the relief time becomes short, the rate of determining the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed although variable display is performed using a specific variable display pattern during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) The means 1B includes a suggestive performance execution means capable of executing a suggestive performance related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown performance, an effect performance, and a caption display while waiting for a customer), and the suggestive performance execution means includes: In the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect is higher than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. ~The part where S809 is executed. Also, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the special condition will be satisfied, and it is possible to increase the interest of the player. Further, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or 2B, an explanation performance regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, an explanation is given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B)) The explanation performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any of the means 1B to 3B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview performance execution means is capable of executing the preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result. When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of advance notice performances is higher than when the result is not a specific display result, and the predetermined period before the special condition is met (for example, the remaining number of times until the shortening of the rescue time is 10 or less). 12-31), the percentage of execution of the preview effect is lower when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in Figure 12-31). , the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A (see FIGS. 12-32(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of the means 1B to 4B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview performance execution means is configured to display a specific mode (for example, a performance mode "red") and a predetermined display mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. If the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is higher than that of the predetermined mode. If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result during the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period. In addition, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is low depending on the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A; see FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D)) . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed in a specific manner during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1C) to (means 8C) are disclosed.

(Means 1C) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), and a special variable display pattern (for example, the variable pattern PA3-1 ( A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including , the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17. (for example, the part that executes the variable display of the first identification information), and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the section shown in FIG. 12-13). As shown, the variable display pattern determining means (the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and before the special condition is satisfied. In this case, the special variable display pattern is not determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part that executes steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display using the special variable display pattern is executed. A specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance to notify that the special state is being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, executing step 108IWS806B in the game control microcomputer 100) part. 12-38 (G) and (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification performance execution means executes the specific notification performance when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. When a variable display is executed in which the special condition is satisfied and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is A special notification performance execution means capable of executing a special notification performance that notifies that the is derived and displayed (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. 41 (G'), (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, he or she is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, which can provide surprise to the player and improve interest. I can do it.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the execution is not performed before the special condition is satisfied. It is provided with a predetermined notification performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification performance (for example, a full rotation performance) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the same aspect as before the special condition is satisfied. (For example, even when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, there is a fluctuation This is realized by determining pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PB2-3 (super reach β). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of the means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135; see FIG. 12-36), the special condition is satisfied. During the display period of the display result of the variable display when As shown, the production control CPU 120 includes a portion for executing step 100IWS847. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification performance in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the performance when switching the gaming state, and to improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any one of the means 1C to the means 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. and, after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of the special state (see, for example, FIGS. 12-18). According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to be received externally.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIG. ) outputs a special signal at the start of According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to occur externally.

(Means 8C) In any of the means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where game media passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means (for example, game control (where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game media should be ejected toward a special path (for example, during a gaming state in which the player is assumed to play right-handed). a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that a right-hand ball is being played, and a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that a player is in a right-hand hitting state; The second starting condition is established based on the passing of the game medium through the second passing area, and the special output means is configured to display the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. A special output can be executed at the start of a special process (for example, the next change postponement process shown in FIG. 12-45) that is executed after the display period of . According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that game media should be ejected toward a special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1D) to (means 5D) are disclosed.

(Means 1D) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means that can update numerical information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); and a variable means that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. display pattern determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-48); By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of display execution times, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS170 and Step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special condition is satisfied. After a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, a special notification effect (for example, a background image corresponding to shortening rescue time) is displayed to notify that special state control will start. It further includes a special notification performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) capable of executing the display (orange). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest when the special condition is satisfied. Furthermore, it is possible to use a variable display pattern in common between when the special condition is satisfied and before the special condition is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension memory number buffer or a second suspension memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) in which a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means is a notice target, the look-ahead notice execution means comprising: Among the variable displays corresponding to pending information stored before the special condition is met, it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is met, while the variable display that the special condition is met can be executed. Execution of a pre-read preview performance that targets a variable display after the display is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the presentation.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or 2D, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and executes the special notification performance. This is a mode in which the background display on the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, see FIG. 12-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and increase their interest, and it is also possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any one of the means 1D to 3D includes a means for executing a suggestive effect that can execute a suggestive effect related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a caption display while waiting for a customer, etc.) The suggestive effect execution means limits execution of the suggestive effect during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 5D) In any of the means 1D to 4D, an explanatory effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 12-52 (C1), (C2), At the timings shown in FIGS. 12-53(D) and 12-54(D), explanations will be given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1E) to (means 4E) are disclosed.

(Means 1E-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display pattern determining means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 includes a part that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. , it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a microcomputer for game control 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, a portion that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. ), the variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is more likely to be a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. In this case, there is a high rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). (See Figure 12-7 (C) and Figure 12-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the rate at which the variable display is executed increases due to the shortened variable display pattern, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled is increased. Since the time period will be shortened, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern that corresponds to the execution of the reach effect. (For example, variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) The microcomputer 100 includes a part for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537) can be controlled to a special state after being controlled by the updating means, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. When a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The display pattern determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. (See Figure 12-7 (C) and Figure 12-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the proportion of display results of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern becoming non-specific display results is low, so that a decrease in interest is prevented. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means is capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, a part that executes steps 100IWS634 and S638 in the production control CPU 120) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or 2E, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) a holding storage means (for example, a first holding memory number buffer and a second holding memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as holding information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. , a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means; The method determines the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and which pre-reading notice among the plurality of types. The rate at which the performance is executed is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703. See FIGS. 12-28(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of pre-read preview performance can be determined between the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established. It can be made different and more interesting.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to 3E, a variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a step A part that executes S112), a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer and a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. a buffer), and a pre-read notice execution means capable of executing a pre-read notice performance (for example, a chance effect or a pending change effect) in which the variable display corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending storage means is the subject of the preview, The look-ahead notice execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that targets a variable display when the special condition is met among the variable displays corresponding to the pending information stored before the special condition is met; Execution of a pre-read preview performance that targets variable displays subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is met is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the presentation.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1a) to (means 10a) are disclosed.

(Means 1a) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means can update the numerical information by the update means. When the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, step 100IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means, when variable display of the first identification information is executed. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100). do. According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. I can do it.

In addition, although this example shows a case where an initial value is set in the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots that do not give time savings, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) are provided, and for some jackpots, the initial value of the relief time savings counter is not set. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the first special symbol mainly changes in the normal state, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number of pending memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition is established based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as a display result of the variable display ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 100). According to such a configuration, relief is provided when display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and displayed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 3a) In the means 1a or 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (e.g., variable probability state, time saving state) (e.g., FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so it is possible to control the special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. , Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Note that this example shows the case where the relief time reduction counter is updated on a low probability low base (normal state), a high probability high base (variable probability state), and a low probability high base (time saving state). It is not limited to the form. For example, the relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probable variable state), low probability high base (time saving state), and high probability low base (latent probability variable). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is also possible to apply the present invention to a gaming machine that performs a lottery in which a probability change state falls to a normal state.

Although this example shows a case where the second special symbol is given priority, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the first starting winning hole, and a high probability low base (small winning RUSH) where small wins occur frequently is provided. It may be configured such that the symbols change simultaneously.

Although this example shows a case where a first special symbol and a second special symbol are provided, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, only the first special symbol may be provided.

(Means 4a) In any of the means 1a to 3a, the updating means sets the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, the updating means 100, a portion that executes step 100IWS144, and a portion that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17. According to such a configuration, when controlled to be advantageous, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 5a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100) is configured. may have been done. According to such a configuration, when controlled to be advantageous, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 6a) In the means 4a, the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special display result (e.g., time saving error) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 12 As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, The part that executes step 100IWS167 in the control microcomputer 100) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming more intense than necessary.

(Means 7a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS144 in the game control microcomputer 100). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) The means 4a includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining numerical information to be updated by the updating means even when the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held in the backup storage means is set to an initial value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS8 and step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100 ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained when initialization is performed at the gaming parlor, it may be too disadvantageous for the gaming parlor. It can be made easier.

(Means 9a) Any one of the means 1a to 8a is provided with an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state The control means is capable of controlling the special state for a specific period exceeding the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the microcomputer 100 for game control The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100) It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the production control means executes different productions in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIG. 12-47). The portion shown in Example 4) may also be configured. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation where the control is not in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so it is necessary to take measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display. By changing the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

(Means 10a) Any one of the means 1a to 8a is provided with an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state The control means is capable of controlling the special state for a specific period exceeding the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the microcomputer 100 for game control The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100) It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the production control means executes a common production in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100). (portion shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, the situation is such that it has not been controlled to be in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by intentionally executing the same performance, it is possible to maintain an advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being more aware of the uncontrolled situation than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b) are disclosed.

(Means 1b-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and a gaming area that can play game media separately into a first route (for example, a left-handed route) and a second route (for example, a right-handed route); State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update the numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the game that is necessary to execute multiple types of processing including variable display control and advantageous state control. A process execution means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that updates a data value indicating the progress state and executes a process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is, Numerical information is updated depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the microcomputer 100 for game control (For example, as shown in FIG. S110 to S113), when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second processing related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 (a part that executes S114 to S117), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100) In the normal state, the game is played by ejecting the game media to the first path, and in the special state, A game is played by firing game media into the second route, and firing promotion notification means (see Figure 12-46) executes firing promotion notification to the effect that the game media should be fired to the second route during execution of the third process. ). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by giving a firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform effects related to the firing promotion notification earlier when the special state is being controlled.

(Means 1b-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a variable display control, and an advantageous state control. Process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part of the microcomputer 100 that executes step S25), and the state control means enters the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the step in the game control microcomputer 100) 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173), the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes the first process regarding the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100). 5, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes the second process regarding the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) 5, when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means establishes the special condition. The third process for controlling the original special state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state is changed during execution of the third process. The present invention is characterized in that it includes a performance execution means (see FIG. 12-46) that performs a notification performance to notify that the control is being performed. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by performing the firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform an effect related to the firing promotion notification earlier when being controlled to the special state.

Although this example shows a case where priority is given to processing related to jackpots, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration may be such that priority is given to processing related to variable display or processing related to saving time saving.

In addition, although this example shows a case where a right hit is notified in the next fluctuation postponement process which is the third process, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured such that only a mode transition effect suggesting a shift to a time saving state is executed without giving a right-handed hit notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the processing execution means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed, and step 100IWS114 is not executed. According to such a configuration, priority is given to controlling the advantageous state, so that no disadvantageous result is produced for the player, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In the means 1b-1, the means 1b-2, or the means 2b, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, for game control The processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the microcomputer 100). 17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes different processes when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 12-14, the part that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4b) The means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display, and The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that is different when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 (the part that executes) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(Means 5b) In the means 3b, a variable display pattern determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern of the variable display, The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern in which the finalization time of the display result is different depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, (a portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS1128 and step 100IWS1130). According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1c) to (means 6c) are disclosed.

(Means 1c) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game It is a gaming machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), and a variable display. Production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, step 108IWS811 in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. , the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and the variable display is executed. The update means (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 12-13) and the state controlled by the state control means can update the numerical information based on the above information. a state information control means for controlling specifiable state information, the state control means being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and then changing to a special state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-12, the part that executes step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17) (in the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means updates the state information to the first numerical value in the normal state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flags A and C are not set, and the corresponding data is " 0''), the state information is set to the second numerical value when the control is performed to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, As shown in 19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is "1"), and the special condition is established. When the special state is controlled, the state information is set to a third value different from the first value and the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. part, that is, the time saving flag C is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means, and when in a special state, the state It is possible to transmit specific information depending on whether the information is a second numerical value or a third numerical value (for example, as shown in Figure 12-10, as shown in Figure 12-19, The part that executes step 100IWS540 in the microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

Although this example shows a case where a time-saving state A designation command and a time-saving state C designation command are transmitted as the specific information, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the background specification command and the fluctuation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a manner that allows it to be specified that the user is in a time saving state via a jackpot, a time saving state via a time saving loss, or a time saving state via a relief time reduction. Good too. For example, when a jackpot occurs, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) and a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) are transmitted in different ways depending on the gaming state, and depending on which command is received, The fanfare period and ending period may be configured to change.

(Means 2c) In the means 1c, when the special condition is established again after being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the status information control means changes the status information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or 2c, the effect control means controls when the state control means performs control to a special state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, and when the state control means realizes that the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured such that a different effect can be executed when the special state is controlled based on what has happened (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a part that executes steps 100IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when special conditions are established, so it is possible to perform effects according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any of the means 1c to 3c, the effect control means controls the special state when the state control means performs control to a special state based on the derivation and display of a specific display result; It is possible to execute a common effect when controlling to a special state based on the fulfillment of a condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS634 and step 100IWS638). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and this prevents an increase in development costs because new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 5c) In any of the means 1c to 4c, the state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving error) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means is based on the fact that the state control means has derived and displayed the special display result. Different effects can be executed when the special state is controlled and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 100IWS636, The part that executes S638) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when a special condition is established, so it is possible to execute a performance according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any one of the means 1c to 4c, the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means: When the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation and display of the special display result, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, It may be configured such that the performance can be executed (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS636 and step 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and this prevents an increase in development costs because new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1d) to (means 4d) are disclosed.

(Means 1d) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game It is a gaming machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), and a variable display. Production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, step 108IWS811 in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. , the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and the variable display is executed. An updating means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above, and when the power supply is stopped, The state control means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of execution times of the variable display, and the state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. When a condition is satisfied, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17) , the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means uses predetermined information for performance control when power supply is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the performance control means can supply power based on receiving the predetermined information. It is characterized by being able to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of execution times of the variable display during a predetermined period after the start of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. do. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, players are motivated to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, and the operating rate of the gaming machines can be increased.

Note that in this example, the initial roll is shown as a suggestion effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to perform a background change, a fluctuating effect up to 100 revolutions, or a suggestive effect by displaying on a demo screen or menu screen.

In addition, when the command specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 12-12) is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect. .

(Means 2d) In the means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can specify numerical information held by the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started (for example, in FIG. As shown in 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, it gives players an incentive to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines and suppressing an increase in the processing load.

Note that although this example shows a case where a command that can specify the value of the rescue time reduction counter is transmitted at the time of recovery, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, sending a command that can specify a predetermined range such as specifying 1 to 99 rotations in units of 100 rotations, specifying 100 to 199 rotations, specifying 500 to 599 rotations, etc. It may be configured such that if the value of the time saving number counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but if the value is 127 or less, a command that can be specified is transmitted.

(Means 3d) In the means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in connection with the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, The part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the performance control means can execute a special performance related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of special conditions based on specific information ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the production control CPU 120) can specify, as specific information, that the difference between the number of executions of variable display and the special number of times is less than a predetermined value. First specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, a command specifying the number of rescue time reduction times 1) and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, a relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses and to suitably implement processing related to specific information.

Note that this example shows a case where the second specific information, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, is transmitted when the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value. Not limited to. For example, it may be configured such that when the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value, the command for specifying the number of times of saving time reduction 2, which is the second specific information, is not transmitted.

(Means 4d) In any of the means 1d to 3d, the production control means is controlled to be in a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the first predetermined number of variable displays being executed, which is smaller than the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the performance control CPU 120, )), it is possible to perform a suggestion effect each time a second predetermined number of variable displays smaller than the first predetermined number of times is performed before a special number of variable displays are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the performance control CPU 120 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) to 12-38 (F)). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to players, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses.

Note that although this example shows a case where the effect is executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the rescue time reduction number counter.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of gaming machines shown below (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) are disclosed.

(Means 1e-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120); Production control means that controls production corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display are executed. update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an update means that can update the numerical information based on the state of the A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display, and a backup storage containing information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means that can initialize the storage contents of the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, a part that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means includes an update means. When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, a special condition can be controlled when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), The performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and before a specific display result is derived and displayed; There is a difference between when the storage contents of the storage means are initialized, a specific display result is derived and displayed, and then the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, and when the special state is controlled by the state control means. It is characterized by executing effects (for example, the portions shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIG. 12-47). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as guessing setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120); Production control means that controls production corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display are executed. update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an update means that can update the numerical information based on the state of the A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display, and a backup storage containing information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means that can initialize the storage contents of the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, a part that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means includes an update means. When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, a special condition can be controlled when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), The performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and before a specific display result is derived and displayed; After the storage contents of the storage means are initialized, the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. (for example, the portion shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 in FIG. 12-47). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as guessing setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that although this example shows a case where only the variation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to be used with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables as in the case after a jackpot.

Note that the configurations of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied to this feature section 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed. A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, and an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, the state control means controlling the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result of The update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by becoming a corresponding specific value, and the updating means can be controlled to be in a special state when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed. There are multiple types of advantageous states, including specific advantageous states and special advantageous states, and depending on which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled, the numerical information is updated. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a particularly advantageous state is different, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a particularly advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state. The degree of advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1f, for example, the special advantageous state is set as a definite variable jackpot, the specific advantageous state is set as a normal jackpot, and the time saving state after a fixed variable time reduction is set as after a normal jackpot. It may be configured such that the advantage is higher than the time saving state of , and the time saving state of relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state after a normal jackpot.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, the advantageous state is controlled when the variable display of the first identification information triggers the advantageous state and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers the control into the advantageous state. The rate at which the vehicle is controlled to a special state with a special advantage after being controlled is different; when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the special condition to be satisfied is the same as the special number of times when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, the first identification information can be changed while increasing the interest by providing different gameplay characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the special number of times is the same in both cases of displaying and variable displaying of the second identification information, it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f, for example, the rate of special advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot (time saving continues until the next jackpot) is set to the first special symbol. and the second special symbol, and 800 times, which is the condition that the relief time is controlled to be shortened when controlled to be a jackpot based on the first special symbol and when controlled to be a jackpot based on the second special symbol. The structure may be configured so that the number of fluctuations is the same.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or 2f, an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state higher than the first probability. The special condition is provided with a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including The advantage of a special state that is easy to establish and is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when an unfavorable set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be advantageous. By having a higher advantage than the state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the settings can be changed in six levels from "1" to "6". In addition, setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") reduces the number of fluctuations, which is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time, than setting it to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"). However, the advantage in saving time may be configured to be higher than the advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot. Note that the rescue time reduction achievement rate is higher when set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than when set to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"); Since the number of times is 800 (substantially until the next jackpot), it may be more advantageous than the time-saving state via a jackpot (for example, the number of time-savings is usually 100 after a jackpot).

(Means 4f) Any one of the means 1f to 3f is provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of advantageous special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantageousness of the special state that will be controlled when the special condition is met. is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the setting value that is set, and it is possible to realize a healthy gaming experience.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4f, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time-saving states will be controlled after a jackpot is set in common regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in saving time-saving is also set when any setting value is set. The structure may be configured so that they are also common.

(Means 5f) When any of the means 1f to 4f is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled differs depending on the case, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same when the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed, and the game is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling quality and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5f, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is controlled to be short based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is controlled to be shortened based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the advantages of the two are common.

(Means 6f) In any one of the means 1f to 5f, a variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established, than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result is a non-specific display result, there is a high probability that the shortened variable display pattern will be selected. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 6f is based on, for example, a configuration using the fluctuation pattern table E shown in FIG. 12-8(E).

(Means 7f) Any one of the means 1f to 6f includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern The determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. The proportion of specific variable display patterns is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 7f is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 8f) In any of the means 1f to 7f, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from numerical information based on variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means By setting special information, it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. a backup storage means capable of retaining the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means and the setting information of the special information even if the updating means terminates the special state based on the fact that the power supply is stopped; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. initializing means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8f initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 12-11, for example, while The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, and a start condition established when a start condition is satisfied. a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on a start condition; a hold storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when a start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; a backup storage means capable of retaining numerical information and pending information; an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met; and power supply is started. and a recovery means capable of executing recovery control for restoring the numerical information updated by the update means and the pending information stored in the pending storage means based on the storage contents of the backup storage device, and the state control device includes: , the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and after the recovery control is executed. , when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored pending information, the updating means can be controlled to a special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the control by initialization while suppressing the occurrence of disadvantages to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1g, for example, when executing the initialization processing, the relief time saving counter and the pending memory are reset, while when recovering from a power outage, the Restore the relief time reduction counter and pending memory, and configure the system so that when the fluctuation display corresponding to the pending memory at the time of recovery reaches the 800th variation and the conditions for the relief time reduction control are met, the relief time reduction control becomes possible. Bye.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, an advantageous state is achieved when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The rate at which the vehicle is controlled to a special state with a special advantage after being controlled is different; when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the special condition to be satisfied is the same as the special number of times when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, the first identification information can be changed while increasing the interest by providing different gameplay characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the special number of times is the same in both cases of displaying and variable displaying of the second identification information, it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g, for example, the rate of special advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot (time saving continues until the next jackpot) is set to the first special symbol. and the second special symbol, and the variation that becomes the condition for controlling the relief time to be shortened depending on when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the number of times is the same.

(Means 3g) In the means 1g or 2g, there is an unfavorable setting value in which the probability of being controlled into an advantageous state is a first probability, and an advantageous setting where the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability. The special condition is provided with a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including The advantage of a special state that is easy to establish and is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when an unfavorable set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. By having a higher advantage than the state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3g, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". In addition, setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") will reduce the number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened, and will shorten the rescue time, compared to setting it to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"). What is necessary is to configure the advantageous degree of this to be higher than the advantageous degree of the time saving state after the jackpot. Note that setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") has a higher probability of failure than setting an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so it is easier to save time. ,Relief time saving is always 800 time saving times (substantially until the next jackpot), so it is more advantageous than the time saving state via jackpot (for example, usually after the jackpot, the time saving number is 100 times). Good too.

(Means 4b) Any one of the means 1g to 3g is provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of advantageous special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantageousness of the special state that will be controlled when the special condition is met. is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the setting value that is set, and it is possible to realize a healthy gaming experience.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4g, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the settings can be changed in six levels from "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time-saving states will be controlled after a jackpot is set in common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in saving time is also set when any setting value is set. It may be configured so that they are also common.

(Means 5g) When any of the means 1g to 4g is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled differs depending on the case, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same when the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed, and the game is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling quality and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5g, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is controlled to be short based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is controlled to be shortened based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the advantages of the two are common.

(Means 6g) In any one of the means 1g to 5g, a variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established, than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result is a non-specific display result, there is a high probability that the shortened variable display pattern will be selected. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 6g is based on a configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 7g) Any one of the means 1g to 6g includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern The determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. The proportion of specific variable display patterns is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 7g is based on a configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 8g) In any of the means 1g to 7g, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from numerical information based on variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means By setting special information, it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. a backup storage means capable of retaining the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means and the setting information of the special information even if the updating means terminates the special state based on the fact that the power supply is stopped; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. initializing means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8g initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 12-11, for example, while The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, the state control means comprising an update means. The numerical information updated by the first identification information becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means The system further includes a suggestion performance execution means capable of updating the numerical information depending on whether the display is executed or when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and is capable of executing a suggestion production related to the establishment of the special condition. In the execution means, the ratio of which of the plurality of presentation modes is used to execute the suggestion effect varies depending on the number of executions of the variable display, and the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation suggests a period until the special condition is satisfied. This is the mode of doing so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the performance mode of the suggestive performance, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1h, for example, it is necessary to decide whether or not to execute a countdown effect that suggests the number of fluctuations that is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time. The ratio may be configured to change according to the count value of the relief time saving counter. Further, the gaming machine of the means 1h can be realized by, for example, using a table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the performance mode.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is such that the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied can be specified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown performance in a mode that suggests the number of fluctuations that is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time.

(Means 3h) In the means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is an effect that displays a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of color and size is different, and in which mode it is displayed. The period until the suggested special conditions come into effect differs depending on whether the special conditions are met. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the aspect of a specific image and improve interest.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 3h is configured to use, for example, the table shown in FIG. Based on. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers counting down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to differ depending on the count value of the relief time saving counter.

(Means 4h) In any of the means 1h to 3h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and displays the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestive effects are executed differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-25 is used to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer.

(Means 5h) In any of the means 1h to 4h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and displays the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive performance, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 5h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-25 is used to determine the presentation mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer.

(Means 6h) In any of the means 1h to 5h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. display means, and the suggestive performance execution means detects that the operation means has been operated or that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. Suggestive effects can be performed based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to a player who actually plays a game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of the means 6h, for example, when the game machine shifts to the demonstration state, the game ball is activated by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or by the starting port. If detected, it may be configured to display a telop indicating the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) Any of the means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means: Depending on which setting value is set, the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is to be executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the means 7h is based on a configuration that uses the table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a subtitle while waiting for a customer.

(Means 8h) Any one of the means 1h to 7h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means: Depending on which setting value is set, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the means 8h is based on a configuration that uses the table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the presentation mode.

(Means 9h) In any of the means 1h to 6h, a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and A setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggested setting suggestion performance; The effect executing means has the same rate of executing the suggested effect regardless of the setting value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is being executed, and it is also possible to suppress complication of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 9h, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) is required. The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the set value (for example, a performance that has different execution rates depending on the set value), it is also possible to display a caption while waiting for a customer regardless of which set value is set. The configuration may be configured so that the ratio is the same.

(Means 10h) Any one of the means 1h to 6h and the means 9h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; a setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance suggesting a setting value, and the setting suggestion performance execution means executes a setting suggestion performance in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different, and the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is the same depending on the specific mode, regardless of the set value of the suggestion effect execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestive performance, and it is also possible to suppress complication of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 10h, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests a setting value (for example, a performance with different execution rates depending on the setting value), it is also possible to execute a performance that indicates a setting value, while waiting for customers in a red performance mode regardless of which setting value is set. The configuration may be such that the execution rate of the telop display is the same.

(Means 11h) In any of the means 1h to 10h, the suggestive performance execution means determines whether the power supply is performed depending on whether the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started or the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed during a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 11c, for example, the execution rate of the ticker display and countdown effect while waiting for a customer is different after the initialization process and after the power outage recovery. You can configure it like this.

(Means 12h) Any one of the means 1h to 11h includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determining means is configured to When the special variable display pattern is established, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and the special variable display pattern is not determined before the special condition is satisfied, and the special state is set when variable display using the special variable display pattern is being executed. The device further includes a specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance for notifying that the device is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and also to clearly inform the player of the change in the gaming state, and to increase the interest when the special condition is satisfied. can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 12h is based on, for example, a configuration using a pattern table for relief time saving fluctuation failure shown in FIG. 12-8(I).

(Means 13h) In any of the means 1h to 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. Yes, when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result, the proportion of the specific variable display pattern being determined is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is longer than the predetermined period. Compared to the previous period, when the display result of variable display does not result in a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 13h is based on a configuration using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12-8(F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) Any one of the means 1h to 13h is provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The execution means can execute the preview effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result does not become a specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In this case, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is higher than in the case where no specific display result is obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is met is higher than the period before the predetermined period. When the result is not a specific display result, the ratio of executing preview effects is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 14h is based on a configuration in which, for example, a table shown in FIG. 12-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance.

(Means 15h) Any one of the means 1h to 14h is provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The execution means is capable of executing the preview effect according to the specific mode and the predetermined mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result, and the display of the variable display When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of preview effects executed in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the preview performance depending on the specific mode is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the performance mode.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 4A First special symbol display device, 4B Second special symbol display device, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative symbol display area, 6A Winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning hole, 11 main board, 12 performance control board, 13 audio control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First starting port switch, 22B Second starting port switch, 23 Count switch, 25A First holding indicator, 25B Second holding indicator, 25C Normal figure holding indicator, 30 Batted ball operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81, 82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control section.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player based on a display result of a variable display of performance identification information becoming a specific display result,
a firing means capable of firing game media according to a player's operation;
Display means for displaying a guide prompting the player to fire the game medium toward the second region of the first region and the second region;
a guide light emitting means that emits a guide light to prompt the player to fire the game medium toward the second area by moving a light emitting part of the light emitting means;
a state control means capable of controlling to a specific state;
an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of variable display;
a state control means capable of controlling a special state more advantageous than the normal state after the control of the advantageous state is completed ;
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to the specific state when a specific condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating device becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times;
The guide display includes a first guide display and a second guide display,
The display means is
Displaying the second guide display in a first period of a predetermined period in which a start effect regarding the start of control of the advantageous state is executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state. and performing the first guidance display and the second guidance display in a second period that is during the predetermined period and subsequent to the first period, and in a subsequent period, terminating the first guidance display. The second guidance display is performed at
Displaying the second guidance in the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed;
When the specific condition is met, it is possible to execute a specific notification effect that notifies that the specific condition has been met,
not performing the first guide display when the start effect is being executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the special state;
The guide light emitting means is configured to perform, when the start effect is executed based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result in the normal state,
In the first period, the light emitting means can emit light in a light emission mode different from the guide light emission,
extinguishing the light emitting means before the second period starts;
emitting the guide light together with the first guide display when the second period starts;
The specific notification performance is a performance that reduces the visibility of the performance identification information,
A gaming machine characterized by: